Toyota 2011 Matrix Owner Manual

Toyota 2011 Matrix Owner Manual
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
4WD
4 Wheel Drive
A/C
Air Conditioning
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
ACC
Accessory
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
AWD
All Wheel Drive
CRS
Child Restraint System
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EDR
Event Data Recorder
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
GAWR
Gross Axle Weight Rating
GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M
LATCH
488
MEANING
Emission inspection and maintenance
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M+S
Mud and Snow
MTBE
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD
On Board Diagnostics
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
TIN
Tire Identification Number
TPMS
Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC
Traction Control
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that these
parts are not covered by Toyota warranty and that Toyota is not responsible
for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may
cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
18
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle may
affect electronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake
system, SRS airbag system or seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to
check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
19
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be
fatal to children.
20
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause death or injury to people if
the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or
its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must
or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota
and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through means “Do not”, “Do not
do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
21
22
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
1
Pictorial index
Exterior
Headlights (low beam) P. 135
Headlights (high beam) and daytime
running lights P. 135, 136
Hood P. 332
Moon roof ∗
P. 59
Outside rear view
mirrors P. 55
Front turn signal/parking and front
side marker lights P. 126, 135
Windshield wipers P. 138
Front fog lights ∗ P. 137
6
Rear window defogger P. 179
Fuel filler door
Doors
P. 62
P. 29
Rear window wiper ∗ P. 140
Back door
P. 34
License plate lights P. 135
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 351
P. 411
P. 454
P. 460
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights P. 135
Rear turn signal lights P. 126
∗: If equipped
7
Pictorial index
Seat belts
P. 46
Head restraints
P. 44
Interior
SRS driver airbag
P. 71
Bottle holders
P. 290
Power window
switches ∗ P. 57
SRS front passenger
airbag P. 71
Bottle holders P. 290
Glove box
P. 287
Cup holders P. 288
Floor mat P. 303
Grocery bag hook
Console box P. 287
SRS side airbags
8
P. 300
P. 71
Front seats
P. 38
A
Vehicles with moon roof
Vanity mirrors P. 294
Sun visors P. 293
Auxiliary box P. 291
Moon roof switches
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 59
P. 71
Interior lights P. 283
Personal/interior lights P. 284
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 53
Compass ∗ P. 311
∗: If equipped
9
Pictorial index
Interior
A
Vehicles without moon roof
Vanity mirrors P. 294
Sun visors P. 293
Personal lights P. 285
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 71
Interior lights P. 283
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
10
P. 53
B
Door lock switch ∗
Inside door lock button
P. 30
P. 29
Window lock switch ∗
P. 57
Power window switches ∗
P. 57
∗: If equipped
11
Pictorial index
Interior
C
Power outlet ∗ P. 298
Cup holders P. 288
Power outlet ∗ P. 298
Cigarette lighter ∗ P. 297
Parking brake lever P. 127
AUX port ∗ P. 225
AUX port/USB port ∗ P. 206, 213, 225
∗: If equipped
12
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Gauges and meters P. 129
Headlight switch P. 135
Turn signal lever P. 126
Fog light switch ∗ P. 137
Outside rear view
mirror switches P. 55
Fuel filler door opener
P. 62
Emergency
flasher switch P. 390
Horn
P. 128
Security indicator
P. 66
Audio system P. 180
Windshield wiper and washer
switch P. 138
Rear window wiper and
washer switch ∗ P. 140
Tire pressure warning reset switch ∗ P. 351
Tilt and telescopic steering control lever
P. 52
∗: If equipped
13
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
A
Air conditioning system P. 172
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
switch ∗/rear window defogger switch ∗ P. 179
14
B
Engine (ignition) switch P. 115
Audio remote control
switches P. 227
Telephone switches ∗
P. 253
Cruise control switch ∗ P. 141
Talk switch ∗ P. 253
∗: If equipped
15
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
C
Clock P. 295
Shift lock override
button ∗ P. 426
16
Shift lever P. 119, 124
D
VSC/TRAC off switch P. 145
Auxiliary box P. 291
Hood lock release
lever P. 332
∗: If equipped
17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Index
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Correct driving posture .........
SRS airbags .........................
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........
Child restraint systems .........
Installing child restraints .......
1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................... 24
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Wireless remote control ....... 26
Doors.................................... 29
Back door ............................. 34
2
69
71
83
88
92
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ...........................
Rear seats............................
Head restraints .....................
Seat belts .............................
Steering wheel .....................
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror..................................
Outside rear view mirrors .....
38
42
44
46
52
104
115
119
124
126
127
128
2-2. Instrument cluster
53
55
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows
Power windows .................... 57
Moon roof ............................. 59
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .... 62
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system................................ 66
Theft prevention labels
(except for Canada) ........... 68
2
Driving the vehicle ..............
Engine (ignition) switch.......
Automatic transmission ......
Manual transmission...........
Turn signal lever .................
Parking brake .....................
Horn....................................
Gauges and meters ............ 129
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 132
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch .................
Fog light switch...................
Windshield wipers and
washer ..............................
Rear window wiper and
washer ..............................
135
137
138
140
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control...................... 141
Driving assist systems ........ 145
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage .............
Vehicle load limits ...............
Winter driving tips ...............
Trailer towing
(1.8 L 4-cylinder
[2ZR-FE] engine) ..............
Trailer towing
(2.4 L 4-cylinder
[2AZ-FE] engine) ..............
Dinghy towing (automatic
transmission) ....................
Dinghy towing (manual
transmission) ....................
3
150
153
154
158
159
167
168
213
221
225
Bluetooth audio system....
Using the Bluetooth®
audio system ....................
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player....
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player....
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ................................
2
230
233
239
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Air conditioning system ....... 172
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers ............... 179
3-2. Using the audio system
180
183
190
3
241
246
3-4. Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)
features ............................
Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone) ...........
Making a phone call ...........
Setting a cellular phone......
Security and system
setup ................................
Using the phone book ........
1
227
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
®
Interior features
Audio system types.............
Using the radio....................
Using the CD player............
Playing MP3 and WMA
discs..................................
Operating an iPod ...............
Operating a USB
memory ............................
Optimal use of the audio
system..............................
Using the AUX port.............
Using the steering wheel
audio switches..................
4
5
247
6
252
262
266
271
275
197
206
3
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list .................
• Interior light ......................
• Personal/interior lights......
• Personal lights .................
282
283
284
285
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features.......
• Glove box .........................
• Console box .....................
• Cup holders......................
• Bottle holders ...................
• Auxiliary boxes .................
286
287
287
288
290
291
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors ..........................
Vanity mirrors .....................
Clock ..................................
Ashtrays .............................
Cigarette lighter..................
Power outlet .......................
Grocery bag hook...............
Seatback table ...................
Floor mat ............................
Luggage compartment
feature ..............................
Compass ............................
4
293
294
295
296
297
298
300
302
303
304
311
4
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ........... 316
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 319
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 322
General maintenance ......... 324
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs .......................... 327
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .......................
Hood ...................................
Positioning a floor jack........
Engine compartment ..........
Tires....................................
Tire inflation pressure .........
Wheels................................
Air conditioning filter ...........
Key battery .........................
Checking and replacing
fuses .................................
Light bulbs ..........................
328
332
334
337
351
360
364
366
368
371
380
5
When trouble arises
6
6-1. Specifications
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ............
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ...........................
If you think something is
wrong ................................
Fuel pump shut off
system ..............................
Event data recorder ............
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 442
Fuel information.................. 457
Tire information .................. 460
390
391
397
1
2
6-2. Customization
398
399
Customizable features........ 472
6-3. Initialization
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ..........................
If you have a flat tire............
If the engine will not start ....
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P....................
If you lose your keys ...........
If the battery is
discharged ........................
If your vehicle overheats .....
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .................................
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency ........................
Vehicle specifications
Items to initialize................. 474
401
411
425
426
427
428
433
7
For owners
3
4
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 476
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 477
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 479
5
6
436
Index
438
Abbreviation list......................... 488
Alphabetical index ..................... 489
What to do if... ........................... 498
5
7
MATRIX
2 0 1 1
QUICK REFERENCE
GUIDE
2011
Corolla Matrix
This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle
operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental
operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main
equipment quickly and easily.
The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for
the Owner’s Manual located in your vehicle’s glove box. We
strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and
supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding
of your vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.
Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your
new Corolla Matrix.
! A word about safe vehicle operations
This Quick Reference Guide is not a full description of
Corolla Matrix operations. Every Corolla Matrix owner should
review the Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle.
Pay special attention to the boxed information highlighted in
color throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe
operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment
malfunction.
All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at
the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make
changes at any time without notice.
INDEX
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Air Conditioning/Heating
Audio
Auto lock/unlock2
Automatic Transmission
Auxiliary storage
Bottle holders
Clock
Cruise control
Cup holders
Door-Back
Door locks-Power
Light control-Instrument panel
Lights & turn signals
Moonroof
Parking brake
Power outlet-12V DC
Power outlet-115V AC
Seat adjustments-Front
Seat adjustments-Rear
Seats-Head restraints
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Windows-Power
Windshield wipers & washers
SAFETY AND
EMERGENCY FEATURES
2
16
14-15
8
8
17
19
10
17
18
13
13
16
11
13
10
19
19
9
9
9
18
10
12
12
20
21
20
21
20
Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature.
Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and
more information.
1
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
1
Doors-Child safety locks
Seat belts
Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Spare tire & tools
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System
7
6
7
4-5
4
2-3
6
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Engine maintenance
Fuel tank door release and cap
Hood release
Indicator symbols
Instrument cluster
Instrument panel
Keyless entry1
OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel audio controls
Telephone controls*
Voice command button*
Ignition switch
Cruise control*
VSC/TRAC OFF switch
Auxiliary storage
Power outside rearview mirror control
Headlight, turn signal and front fog light* controls
Wiper and washer controls
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
2
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
* If equipped
3
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Front passenger seat belt reminder light
Engine immobilizer indicator
Emergency flasher button
Audio system
Air Conditioning controls
Outside rearview mirrors*/Rear window defogger button
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System reset
Tilt and telescopic steering control
Hood lock release lever
OVERVIEW
Instrument cluster
Service indicator and reminder
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Outside temperature
Odometer/Trip meter reset/Instrument panel light control
Engine coolant temperature
Automatic Transmission shift range display (if equipped)
Odometer and two trip meters
Indicator symbols
For details, refer to “Indicators and warning lights,” Section 2-2, 2011
Owner’s Manual.
Brake system warning1
Driver seat belt reminder
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
Front passenger seat belt reminder
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
Charging system warning1
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator
1
If indicator does not turn off within a few seconds of starting engine, there may
be a malfunction. Have vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
4
Electric power steering warning1
Low fuel level warning
OVERVIEW
Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1
Open door warning
SRS Airbag warning1
Low Tire Pressure Warning1
Headlight low/high beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
Fog light indicator
Slip indicator1
Vehicle Stability Control off indicator1
Traction control OFF indicator1
Cruise control indicator
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Engine immobilizer system indicator
Cruise control SET indicator
Anti-lock Brake System warning1
Low engine oil pressure warning1
Maintenance/Service required indicator1
Active torque control 4WD system warning1
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
5
OVERVIEW
Keyless entry (if equipped)
Locking operation
Unlocking operation
Push ONCE: Driver door
TWICE: All doors
NOTE: If a door is not opened within
60 seconds of unlocking, all doors will
relock for safety.
Push
Panic button
Push and hold
Fuel tank door release and cap
Pull
Turn to open
Store
NOTE: Tighten until one click is
heard. If the cap is not tightened
enough, Check Engine “
”
indicator may illuminate.
6
Hood release
OVERVIEW
Pull
Pull up latch
and raise hood
Engine maintenance
4 cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
4 cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil level dipstick
Windshield washer fluid tank
7
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
NOTE: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will
help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.
Please refer to the “Warranty Maintenance Guide.”
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Auto lock/unlock (if equipped)
Automatic door locks can be programmed to operate in three different
modes, or turned OFF.
-Doors lock when shifting from Park.
-Doors unlock when shifting into Park.
-Doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after
setting the ignition switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
Automatic Transmission (if equipped)
Standard type
Multi-mode type
Park*
Reverse
Park*
Neutral
Reverse
Drive
3
2
L
Neutral
Third gear
Second gear
Drive
3
2
L
“S” mode
First gear
“S”
“D”
* The ignition switch must be “ON” and the brake pedal depressed to shift
from Park.
“S” (Sequential) mode
Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position.
+: Upshift (push and release)
-: Downshift (pull and release)
Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking
downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always
drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.
8
Seat adjustments-Front
OVERVIEW
Seat position (forward/backward)
Height crank (driver side only)
Seatback angle
Seats-Head restraints
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Rear
Front
Lock release button
Lock release button
Seat adjustments-Rear
Pull
9
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Fold down
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Parking brake
Set
Release
(2) Push
(1) Pull slightly
Pull
(3) Lower
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Lock release lever
Angle
Length
Hold wheel, push lever down,
set angle and length, and
return lever.
NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.
Clock
Hour set
Minute set
Round off minutes
10
Lights & turn signals
Headlights
OVERVIEW
Headlights
Parking lights
High beam
Low beam
High beam flasher
Front fog lights (if equipped)
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Daytime Running Light system (DRL) Headlights turn on automatically
upon starting engine. The brightness of the headlights will
automatically change depending on the darkness of the surroundings.
Turn
Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Turn signals
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Right turn
Lane change
Lane change
Left turn
11
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Windshield wipers & washers
Front
Intermittent windshield wiper
frequency adjustment
(if equipped)
Single wipe
Increase
Interval wipe
Slow
Fast
Decrease
Pull to wash and wipe
Rear (if equipped)
Wash and wipe
Wipe
Interval wipe
Wash and wipe
NOTE: Rear wiper and washer operate
only when back window is fully closed.
Windows-Power (if equipped)
Driver side
Window lock switch
Up
Down
Automatic operation (driver side only) Push the switch completely down
and release to fully open. To stop window midway, lightly push the switch
in the opposite direction.
Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window
remains operable.
12
Moonroof (if equipped)
Tilting operation
Sliding operation
OVERVIEW
Recommended open position to
minimize wind noise.
Open
Tilt
Close
Close
Push once to open partway; again to
open completely.
Door-Back
Lock
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Unlock
Open
Door locks-Power (if equipped)
Unlock
Lock
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
13
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Audio
Type 1 functions
Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number
Eject CD
Push to
turn
ON/OFF
Push and
turn to
adjust tone
& balance
Seek
station/
CD track
select
Station/CD
track scan
Type 2 functions
Mode
View CD
text
Push to skip
up/down
folder and
radio
category
type
Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number
Eject CD
Push and
turn to
adjust tone
& balance
Push to
turn
ON/OFF
Seek
station/
CD track
select
Station/CD
track scan
Push to skip
up/down
folder and
radio
category
type
Setting
preset
buttons
Mode
Menu
Mute/
pause
View CD
text
CD player
To scan tracks on a disc Push and hold “SCAN.” Push again to hold
selection.
To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.SCROLL.”
14
Radio
OVERVIEW
To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset
button (from
to
or one of
) until you hear a beep. Push desired
preset button (from
to
or one of
) to select.
To scan stations Push and hold “SCAN” to scan preset stations. Push again
to hold selection.
AUX port or USB/AUX port
Press DISC-AUX button to select
correct audio source
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
AUX port
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX port, you can listen to music from a
portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker system while in AUX
mode.
USB port (if equipped)
By connecting a USB-compatible portable audio device or USB memory to
the USB port, you can listen to music from the portable audio device or
USB memory through the vehicle’s speaker system while in USB mode.
Steering wheel switches
Volume control
15
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
v
“v ”
Use to search within the selected audio medium (radio, CD, iPod®, etc.).
“MODE”
Push to turn audio ON and to select an audio mode. Push and hold to
turn the audio system OFF.
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Air Conditioning/Heating
Airflow vent
Use “
” or “
” mode to reduce window fogging (system
automatically switches to fresh air mode).
Fan speed
Temperature selector
For quick cooling, turn to MAX A/C position and select
recirculated air mode (“
” indicator ON).
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Outside rearview mirror (if equipped)/Rear window defogger
Recirculate cabin air (fresh air when OFF)
Light control-Instrument panel
+
Brightness
control
-
16
Cruise control (if equipped)
Turning system ON/OFF
OVERVIEW
System ON/OFF
Functions
Resume2
Increase speed
Cancel1
Set/Decrease speed
2
The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal.
The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph.
Auxiliary storage
Instrument panel
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
1
Pull
Push
17
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Overhead console (if equipped)
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
(if equipped)
Vehicles with moonroof
Vehicles without moonroof
Microphone
Microphone
Steering wheel telephone switches
End call
Volume control
Voice command button
Start call
Bluetooth® technology allows dialing or receipt of calls without taking
hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the compatible
telephone and the system.
Refer to “Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phones),”
Section 3-4 in the Owner’s Manual, or go to Toyota.LetsTalk.com for more
information about phone connections and compatibility.
Cup holders
Front
Rear
18
Bottle holders
Front
Rear
OVERVIEW
Power outlet-12V DC
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Designed for 12V car accessories.
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Power outlet-115V AC (if equipped)
19
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Doors-Child safety locks
Rear door
Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from
the outside.
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning)
System
System reset initialization
1. Push and hold “ SET” button
until the indicator blinks
three times.
2. Wait a few minutes to allow
initialization to complete.
After adjusting tire pressures, or after tires have been rotated or
replaced, turn the ignition switch to “ON” and press and hold the
“
SET” button until indicator blinks three times. Let the vehicle sit for a
few minutes to allow initialization to complete.
Refer to the load label on the door jamb or the Owner’s Manual for tire
inflation specifications.
If the tire pressure indicator flashes for more than 60 seconds and then
remains on, take the vehicle to your local Toyota dealer.
NOTE: The warning light may come on due to temperature changes or
changes in tire pressure from natural air leakage. If the system has not
been initialized recently, setting the tire pressures to factory
specifications should turn off the light.
Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Push up, or squeeze
lock release to lower
20
Seat belts
Too high
OVERVIEW
Take up slack
Keep as low on
hips as possible
If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
re-extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature
is used to help hold child restraint systems securely.
To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child
restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Spare tire & tools
Tool location
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Jack handle
Jack
Spare tire
Wheel nut wrench
Removing the spare tire
(1)
(2)
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning
procedures.
21
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
(1) Turn the knobs to the “UNLOCK” position and remove the deck boards.
(2) Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE CENTER
1-800-331-4331
10%
Printed in U.S.A. 11/10
10-TCS-04006
Cert no. SGSNA-COC-005612
00505-QRG11-MAT
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without wireless remote control
Keys
Key number plate
Vehicles with wireless remote control
Keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (→P. 26)
Key number plate
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using
the key number plate. (→P. 427)
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a wireless remote control key onto an aircraft, make sure you
do not press any buttons on the wireless remote control key while inside the
aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the wireless remote control key in your bag
etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the wireless remote control key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
24
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
● Do not disassemble the key.
25
Before driving
● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control∗
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Sounds an alarm
(press and hold)
Unlocks doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 10 seconds if
an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer,
and lock the vehicle once more.
■ Panic mode
When
is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
∗: If equipped
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Key battery depletion
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 368)
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.
● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication devices
● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
● When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by, a
metallic object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer
● When the wireless key battery is depleted
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. operation signal) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 472)
27
Before driving
■ Conditions affecting operation
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote
control, key or door lock switch.
■ Wireless remote control (if equipped)
1
→P. 26
Before driving
■ Key
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
Vehicles with power door lock
system: Turning the key locks
and unlocks all doors. In the
driver’s door lock, turning the
key once unlocks the driver’s
door. Turning the key again
within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
■ Door lock switch (if equipped)
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Inside lock button
Unlocks the door
Locks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (vehicles with power door lock system)
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Function
Operation
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking function*
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
engine switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.
Before driving
Shift position linked
door locking function*
1
*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
The shift position linked door locking function works when all doors
are closed.
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between set and canceled, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1
Close all the doors and switch the engine switch to the “ON”
position. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch (
or
) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
Function
Shift position linked door locking function*
Shift position linked door
unlocking function*
Driver's door linked door unlocking function
Shift lever
position
Switch position
P
N
*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ When all the doors are locked with the wireless remote control or key
The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch.
The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the wireless remote control or key.
1
■ The doors cannot be locked when
Before driving
The key is in the engine switch and either of the front door is open.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 472)
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock the doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seat.
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
The back door can be locked and unlocked using the wireless
remote control or key.
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
→P. 26
Key
Locks the back door
Unlocks the back door
Opens the back door
■ Back door handle
Use the back door handle when closing.
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If
the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden
braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could
have heat exhaustion.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door, which
may result in death or serious injury of the child.
■ Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door
before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to fall closed
again after it is opened.
35
1
Before driving
● Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit nearby objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
● The back door may fall if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open
or close the back door on an incline
than on a level surface, so beware of
the back door unexpectedly opening or
closing by itself. Make sure that the
back door is fully open and secure
before using the luggage compartment.
● When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the back door, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the back door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may result in
hands or arms being caught.
● Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do
not hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to
break, causing an accident.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door. Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to
fall closed again after it is opened.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
NOTICE
■ Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in
place.
● Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the damper stay rod.
● Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
● Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door.
● Do not place your hand on the damper
stay or apply lateral forces to it.
37
Before driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting
in malfunction.
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Seat position
lever
adjustment
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
Folding down the front passenger's seat (vehicles with seatback table)
STEP 1
38
Move the seat rearward.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
STEP 2
Lower the head restraint and fix
the seatback at the most upright
lock position.
1
Pull up either seatback lock
release knob beside the seatback and fold the seatback
down.
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly forward to help reduce the risk of
whiplash on the seat occupant.
39
Before driving
STEP 3
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
Inner
structure
During
rear-end
collision
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion
to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
● After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
40
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ After returning the seatback to the upright position (vehicles with seatback table)
■ Caution while driving (vehicles with seatback table)
Do not sit on or place anything on the folded seatback.
41
1
Before driving
Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback. Failure to do so will prevent seat belt from
operating properly.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.
42
STEP 1
Stow the rear outside seat belt
buckles and move the rear
center seat belt buckle as
shown.
STEP 2
Lower the head restraints to
the lowest position.
STEP 3
Fold the seatback down while
pulling the seatback lock
release knob.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
■ Caution while driving
Do not sit on the folded seatback.
43
Before driving
● Make sure that the seatback is
securely locked in position by lightly
rocking it back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked,
the red marking will be visible on the
seatback lock release knob. Make
sure that the red marking is not visible.
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Lock
release
button
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
■ Removing the head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pushing
the lock release button.
■ Installing the head restraints
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.
44
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
45
Before driving
■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle
until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
46
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
1
Before driving
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed.
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (→P. 92)
47
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 46)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 88)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 46 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
48
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
1
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 47)
■ Child restraint lock function belt
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
49
Before driving
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
1
Before driving
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
STEP 1
Hold the steering wheel and
press the lever down.
STEP 2
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
1
Normal position
Before driving
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of the rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
STEP 1
Select a mirror to adjust.
Left
1
Right
Before driving
STEP 2
Adjust the mirror.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Folding back the mirrors
Push backward to fold the mirrors.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 179)
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
56
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Power windows∗
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
1
Opening
Before driving
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)*
*: Pressing
the switch in the
opposite direction will stop window travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
∗: If equipped
57
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
58
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Moon roof∗
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up
and down.
■ Opening and closing
1
Open*
Before driving
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully opened position.
Push the switch again to fully
open.
Close*
*: Push the switch in either direction to stop the moon roof partway.
■ Tilt up and down
Tilt up*
Tilt down*
*: Push the switch in either direction to stop the moon roof partway.
∗: If equipped
59
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing
or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ To reduce wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as
driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
60
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
1
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
61
Before driving
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the engine switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and
windows are closed.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
62
STEP 1
Pull up the fuel filler door
opener.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank
cap, turn it until a clicking sound
is heard.
■ Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
63
Before driving
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
1
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static
electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel
vapors to ignite.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause
injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
64
1-5. Refueling
NOTICE
■ Refueling
65
1
Before driving
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
U.S.A.)
FCC ID: WRKRI-34BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
66
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
Canada)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
67
Before driving
CAUTION
1
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (except for Canada)
These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.
68
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (→P. 38)
1
Before driving
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (→P. 38)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(→P. 52)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (→P. 44)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(→P. 46)
69
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
70
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
1
Before driving
Front airbags
Driver airbag and front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
Side and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats.
71
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
Front airbag sensors
SRS warning light
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
Curtain shield airbag sensors
Front passenger airbag
Driver airbag
Side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator lights
Driver’s seat position sensor
Airbag sensor assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat's position
sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front
passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
72
1-7. Safety information
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag
sensor.
73
1
Before driving
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion
of the occupants.
1-7. Safety information
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof
side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be
hot.
● The windshield may crack.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or
deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.
a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the
bed of a truck, etc.).
● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the
vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag
may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even
if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 83)
74
1-7. Safety information
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags)
● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag
on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if
the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 83)
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS front airbags
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
75
1
Before driving
● The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event
of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb.
[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h]).
1-7. Safety information
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if
the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed
to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
76
1-7. Safety information
■ When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● Curtain shield airbags: The portion of
the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side
rail garnishes (padding) containing the
curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.
77
1
Before driving
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.
78
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children. (→P. 88)
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
79
1
Before driving
● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle
but the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the driver's airbag may not
activate correctly in a collision, resulting
in death or serious injury in the event of
collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver
or passenger has items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard or steering wheel pad.
These items can become projectiles
when SRS driver and front passenger
deploy.
80
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and
seriously injure or kill you, should the
SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (→P. 72).
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
81
1
Before driving
● Do not attach anything to areas such as
the door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front and rear pillars, roof side
rail or assist grip.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rail.
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD
players.
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
82
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
1
Before driving
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
83
1-7. Safety information
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
“AIR BAG
ON”
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Flashing*2
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
■ Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
84
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Flashing*2
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Deactivated
Activated
1-7. Safety information
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
*1
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2:
In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3:
When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
85
1
Before driving
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
Not illuminated
lights
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
Activated
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Deactivated
1-7. Safety information
*4:
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(→P. 88)
*5:
In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 92)
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger
side may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
86
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 92)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers
the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
87
1
Before driving
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint system on a rear
seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 92)
88
1-7. Safety information
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child.
1
Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Before driving
Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
Booster seat
89
1-7. Safety information
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 46)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be allowed to be installed on
the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger
seat. Adjust the seatback as uprights as possible and always move the
seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
90
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
91
1
Before driving
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or
a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child
restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (→P. 46)
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
92
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
STEP 2
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 3
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
93
1
Before driving
Canada only
STEP 1
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Canada only
94
STEP 1
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
STEP 2
Latch the buckles onto
the LATCH anchors.
STEP 3
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
STEP 2
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
STEP 3
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
1
Before driving
STEP 1
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
95
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat
down into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
STEP 3
Fully extend the shoulder strap
and then allow it to retract
slightly into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
96
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat
is securely in place.
STEP 4
STEP 5
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.
■ Booster seat
STEP 1
Place the booster seat on the
seat facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
Sit the child in the booster seat.
Fit the seat belt to the booster
seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder, and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(→P. 46)
97
1
Before driving
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
98
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1
Secure the child restraint using
the seat belt or the lower
anchors, and remove the head
restraint.
1
Before driving
STEP 2
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP 3
Replace the head restraint.
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
99
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR
lock mode: (→P. 47)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing or booster
child seat on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a forwardfacing or booster child seat on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible even if the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
100
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is
secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may
cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of
a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
101
1
Before driving
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
1-7. Safety information
102
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■ Starting the engine
→P. 115
■ Driving
Automatic transmission
STEP 1
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(→P. 119)
STEP 2
Release the parking brake.
STEP 3
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
(→P. 127)
Manual transmission
STEP 1
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to
1.
(→P. 124)
STEP 2
Release the parking brake.
STEP 3
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
(→P. 127)
■ Stopping
Automatic transmission
STEP 1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N.
(→P. 119)
Manual transmission
STEP 1
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
STEP 2
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to N.
(→P. 124)
104
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Parking the vehicle
Automatic transmission
STEP 1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2
Set the parking brake.
(→P. 127)
STEP 3
Shift the shift lever to P.
(→P. 119)
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and stop the
engine.
STEP 5
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
Manual transmission
STEP 1
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
STEP 2
Set the parking brake.
(→P. 127)
STEP 3
Shift the shift lever to N.
(→P. 124)
When parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R. If necessary,
block the wheels.
STEP 4
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and stop the
engine.
STEP 5
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
105
2
When driving
STEP 4
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting on a steep uphill
Automatic transmission
STEP 1
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
STEP 2
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
STEP 3
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
STEP 1
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
STEP 2
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
STEP 3
Release the parking brake.
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended
to observe:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
•
•
•
•
106
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system (if equipped)
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota
dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 446)
2
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator
pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
107
When driving
■ When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the
shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor
brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the
vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a
serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an
automatic transmission) or R while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can
cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a
loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause insufficient engine braking and lead to an accident.
● Do not turn the engine off while driving. The power steering and brake
booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running.
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to
overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 120)
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking
brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing
an accident.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of
vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious
injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
108
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Do not drive the vehicle off-road.
This is not a AWD vehicle designed for real off-road driving. Proceed with
all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
● Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage
the engine or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an
accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles
with an automatic transmission) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
109
2
When driving
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Vehicles with an automatic transmission: In order to prevent accidents due
to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while
the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an
automatic transmission), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
110
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and
odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
111
When driving
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance
increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle
to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not
securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the
pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance
becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (AWD models)
Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or
stuck in sand or mud, etc. This may damage the drive system components
or propel the vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.
112
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator
pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
Manual transmission
● Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, transaxle and gears.
● Do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and moving forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
● Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
● Do not shift into reverse when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may
damage the clutch, transaxle and gears.
Automatic transmission
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a
long time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
113
When driving
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (→P. 414)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle, transfer (AWD vehicles), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (AWD vehicles), bearings and
suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings,
etc.
114
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
■ Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
STEP 1
Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
STEP 4
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
Manual transmission
STEP 1
Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
STEP 3
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
STEP 4
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine: The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the
engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds
maximum.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.
115
2
When driving
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine: The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the
engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds
maximum.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Changing engine switch position
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: The key can be
removed only when the shift
lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
116
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Turning the engine switch from “ACC” to “LOCK”
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P (auto-
matic transmission) or N (manual transmission).
(→P. 119, 124)
STEP 2 Push in the key and turn to the
“LOCK” position.
2
■ Steering lock release
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 66)
■ Key reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
engine switch only to the “ACC” position.
117
When driving
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly in either
direction.
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the key in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods if the
engine is not running.
■ When starting the engine
● 2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine ⎯ Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
118
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission∗
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
Standard type
2
When driving
Multi-mode type
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
∗: If equipped
119
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift position uses
Shift position
Function
Standard type
Multi-mode type
P
Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S mode driving*2
(→P. 121)
S
3
Position for engine
braking
2
Position for more
powerful engine braking
L
Position for maximum
engine braking
*1:
Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable
for driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal driving.
*2:
Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the
possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents
unnecessary upshifting.
120
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode (multi-mode type)
Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
2
When driving
The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 4 or 5. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if AI-SHIFT has operated
while the shift lever was in the D position. (→P. 123)
When the shift range is “4” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+”
sets the shift range to “5”.
121
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift ranges and their functions
Shift range
Function
5
A gear between 1 and 5 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4
A gear between 1 and 4 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3
A gear between 1 and 3 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2
A gear between 1 and 2 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1
Setting the gear at 1.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a
higher shift range.
■ Downshifting restrictions (standard type)
The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
mph (km/h)
Downshifting
Maximum speed
3→2
64 (104)
2→L
32 (52)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
mph (km/h)
122
Downshifting
Maximum speed
3→2
57 (92)
2→L
27 (44)
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (S mode in multi-mode type)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will
sound twice.)
■ When driving with the cruise control system (if equipped)
Standard type
Engine braking will not occur when downshifting from D to 3. (→P. 141)
2
Multi-mode type
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P. 426
■ If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever
to S (multi-mode type)
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.
Standard type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
Multi-mode type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
123
When driving
Engine braking will not occur in S mode, even when downshifting to 4.
(→P. 141)
2-1. Driving procedures
Manual transmission∗
■ Shifting the shift lever
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift
lever, and then release the
clutch pedal slowly.
■ Maximum allowable speeds
Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maximum acceleration is necessary.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine (without double wishbone rear suspension)
mph (km/h)
Shift position
Maximum speed
1
31 (50)
2
53 (86)
3
82 (132)
4
112 (181)
∗: If equipped
124
2-1. Driving procedures
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine (with double wishbone rear suspension)
mph (km/h)
Shift position
Maximum speed
1
31 (50)
2
54 (87)
3
83 (134)
4
113 (183)
2
mph (km/h)
Shift position
Maximum speed
1
34 (55)
2
56 (91)
3
82 (132)
4
121 (195)
125
When driving
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
126
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
U.S.A. Canada
2
Sets the parking brake
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.
■ Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (→P. 154)
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
127
When driving
Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(→P. 52)
128
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
2
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Outside temperature display
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40°F (-40°C) to
122°F (50°C).
Odometer/trip meter/instrument panel light control and trip meter
reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being
displayed.
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel light, turn the button.
(→P. 131)
129
When driving
The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the
engine switch is in the “ON” position.
2-2. Instrument cluster
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Automatic
equipped)
transmission
shift
position
indicator
lights
(if
→P. 119
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Low fuel level warning light
→P. 404
130
2-2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
When the headlight switch is
turned on, the brightness will be
reduced slightly unless the control button is turned fully clockwise.
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 433)
131
When driving
■ Display
2
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
Center panel
132
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 126)
Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 136)
Slip indicator
(→P. 146)
Engine immobilizer system indicator (→P. 66)
*1
*1
VSC off indicator
(→P. 147)
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(→P. 146)
(Canada)
(if equipped)
*1
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
Tail light indicator
(→P. 135)
2
Front fog light indicator
(→P. 137)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator
(→P. 83)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 141)
Cruise control set indicator (→P. 141)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer for details.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
133
When driving
*1, 2
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(→P. 135)
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (→P. 401)
*1
*1
(Canada)
(U.S.A.)
*1
*1
(U.S.A.)
(U.S.A.)
*1
*1
*1
(if equipped) (Canada)
*1
*1
(Canada)
(U.S.A.)
*1
*2
*1
*1
(Canada)
*1
(if equipped)
*1
(if equipped)
(on the
instrument
cluster)
(on the
center
panel)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer for details.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or the SRS airbag warning
light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result
in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
134
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually.
The daytime running
lights turn on.
U.S.A.
Canada
The headlights and
all lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
135
2
When driving
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn
on.
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams
off.
Pull the lever toward you to
turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is
released.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help
improve fuel economy.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned OFF and the driver's door
is opened with the key removed from the engine switch while the lights are
turned on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
136
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch∗
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such
as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are
on low beam.
Off
Front fog lights on
2
When driving
∗: If equipped
137
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Wiper can be operated manually.
Intermittent
windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
*: If equipped
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
138
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ The windshield wipers and washers can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
2
■ When the windshield is dry
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
139
When driving
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Rear window wiper and washer∗
Intermittent window wiper
operation
Normal window wiper operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wiper operate automatically.
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wiper operate automatically.
■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in “ON”.
NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
∗: If equipped
140
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control∗
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
2
STEP 1
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
∗: If equipped
141
When driving
■ Setting the vehicle speed
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the speed setting
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
142
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission only) is
depressed.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
■ Cruise control can be set when
● Automatic transmission:
The shift lever is in the D or “3” range (standard type), or in the D or
range “4” or higher of S has been selected (multi-mode type).
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
143
When driving
Pushing the lever up
resumes
the
constant
speed control.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
144
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
2
■ Brake assist
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
■ Active Torque Control 4WD system (if equipped)
Automatically switches from front-wheel drive to AWD (All-Wheel Drive)
according to driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and
stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to AWD
are when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when
the road surface is slippery due to snow or rain etc.
145
When driving
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
2-4. Using other driving systems
When VSC and TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping or the front wheels (2WD),
or 4 wheels (AWD) spin, the indicator flashes to indicate that
VSC/TRAC have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
To disable TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
button to turn off TRAC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
146
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Turning off TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the button while
the vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and VSC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
and VSC off indicator light should
come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
Turning the engine switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems
will automatically re-enable them.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on
even when vehicle speed increases.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•
•
•
•
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after ABS is activated.
■ If the slip indicator light comes on
There is a malfunction in the TRAC and VSC systems. Contact your Toyota
dealer and have your Toyota inspected.
147
When driving
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating
when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from
excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
CAUTION
■ ABS does not operate effectively when
● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
■ Stopping distance when ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads
ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
148
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive
carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care
when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■ When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do
not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
■ Active Torque Control 4WD system
● The AWD system of this vehicle is intended to ensure driving stability on
normal roads. It is not designed for use in demanding situations such as
rally driving.
● Take care when driving on slippery road surfaces.
149
When driving
■ Replacing tires
2
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit⎯
(1)Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
150
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
(→P. 159)
Example on your vehicle
2
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When driving
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 850 lb. (385
kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be
as follows:
850 lb. - 366 lb. = 484 lb. (385 kg -166 kg = 219 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:
484 lb. - 388 lb. = 96 lb. (219 kg - 176 kg = 43 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
151
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do
not stack anything in the luggage compartment. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not
designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer
death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent
the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or
hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
• Tonneau cover (if equipped)
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
152
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity: 850 lb. (385 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
When driving
■ Towing capacity
2
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
1500 lb. (680 kg)
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (→P. 360)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
153
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.
154
2-5. Driving information
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmission), 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
Snow chains can be mounted on 16- and 17-inch tires. They cannot
be mounted on 18-inch tires. Use the correct snow chain size when
mounting the snow chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations on the use of snow chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
● Install the chains on the front tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
155
When driving
Selecting tire chains
2
2-5. Driving information
■ Snow chain installation (vehicles with 16-inch and 17-inch tires)
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear
tires.
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
manual.
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
156
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or
legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
2
When driving
157
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing (1.8 L 4-cylinder [2ZR-FE] engine)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.
Your Toyota is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.
158
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing (2.4 L 4-cylinder [2AZ-FE] engine)
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle.
Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety
and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by
towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
■ Weight limits
■ Gross vehicle weight
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The
gross vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. Also
included is the weight of any special equipment installed on your
vehicle.
■ Gross axle weight
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification
Label.
Certification Label
159
2
When driving
Confirm that the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
2-5. Driving information
■ Trailer tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue
load is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the
maximum 150 lb. (68 kg). (Tongue load / Total trailer weight x
100 = 9 to 11%)
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with
platform scales found at highway weighing stations, building
supply companies, trucking companies, junk yards, etc.
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
Towing a trailer
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established
by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be rated for
towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.
160
2-5. Driving information
■ Before towing
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 360)
● Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation.
● All trailer lights must work in order to be legal.
● Confirm all lights work each time you connect them.
● Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer
is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper
tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
● Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial
or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for
towing purposes.
■ Break-in schedule
Toyota recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any
new power train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) to tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance
due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner's Manual Supplement”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
161
When driving
● Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded.
2
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities.
● Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About
60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining
40% in the rear.
■ Hitches
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent
entry of any substances into the vehicle.
■ When towing a trailer
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (453 kg), trailer brakes are
required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's braking effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
162
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
● Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
■ Brakes
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross
under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in
the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain
installation procedure, ask your Toyota dealer.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system
and cause a malfunction.
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order to
avoid accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind
when towing:
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle.
163
When driving
■ Safety chain
2
2-5. Driving information
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and
loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turns.
● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a larger than normal turning radius.
● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your
vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to
prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may
cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip
the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and
steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no
extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer will stabilize.
● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
164
2-5. Driving information
● To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance when using engine braking, do not use 5th gear (manual
transmission), or do not put the transmission in “D” (automatic
transmission).
● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may
overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when
driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(→P. 433)
STEP 1
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
STEP 2
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
STEP 3
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
STEP 4
Apply the parking brake firmly.
STEP 5
Shift into 1 or R (manual transmission) or P (automatic transmission) and turn off the engine.
165
When driving
● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P (automatic transmission) or in 1 or R (manual
transmission). Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
2
2-5. Driving information
● When restarting after parking on a slope:
STEP 1
With the transmission in the P position (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) depressed,
start the engine. On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed.
STEP 2
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into the R position.
STEP 3
Release the parking brake (also brake pedal on vehicles with
an automatic transmission), and slowly pull or back away from
the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
STEP 4
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
■ To avoid an accident
● Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or posted towing speed limit, whichever
is lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination
increases as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause
loss of control.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long
downhill grades.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced
braking efficiency.
● Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.
166
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing (automatic transmission)
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on
the ground.
2
When driving
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Active
Torque Control 4WD system (AWD models)
2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from
the rear with the front wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious damage
to the transmission.
AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with
any of the wheels on the ground. This
may cause serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Control 4WD
system.
167
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing (manual transmission)
Your vehicle can be dinghy towed in a forward direction (with 4
wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
Towing your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground
To prevent damage to your vehicle, perform the following procedures
before towing.
STEP 1
Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 2
Switch to the “ACC” position. (→P. 115)
Ensure that the audio system and other powered devices have been
turned off.
STEP 3
Release the parking brake.
After towing, leave the engine in idle for at least 3 minutes before
driving the vehicle.
■ Necessary equipment and accessories
Specialized equipment and accessories are required for dinghy towing. Contact the service branch of the motor home manufacturer regarding recommended equipment.
168
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ Dinghy towing direction
Do not tow the vehicle backwards.
Doing so may cause serious damage.
2
When driving
■ To prevent the steering from locking
Ensure the engine switch is in the “ACC” position.
169
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air conditioning system
Heater
Air outlet selection dial
Temperature control dial
Fan speed control dial
Air intake mode switch
Air conditioning system
Air outlet selection dial
Temperature control dial
Fan speed control dial
Air intake mode switch
172
Air conditioning ON/OFF switch
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting (heater)
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to increase the temperature.
■ Adjusting the temperature setting (air conditioning system)
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If
is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
3
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Set the dial to “0” to turn the fan off.
■ Selecting the air outlets
Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be
selected for more detailed adjustment.
Air flows to the upper body.
173
Interior features
Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
Mainly air flows to the feet.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is
on.
: Some models
174
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the windshield and
side windows.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is
on.
■ Switching air intake modes
Press
.
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircuis pressed.
Interior features
lated air mode (indicator on) each time
3
175
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Adjusting the position
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Opening and closing
Open the vent
Close the vent
176
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ For quick cooling (vehicles with air conditioning system)
Turn the temperature control dial to the “MAX A/C” position and select the
recirculated air mode.
■ For quick clearing of the windshield and side windows (vehicles with
air conditioning system)
Press
to turn the air conditioning on.
■ Using the recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
■ When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C) (vehicles with air
conditioning system)
■ When
is pressed.
is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature adjustment dial.
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to
during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
177
Interior features
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
178
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Clear the rear window using the defogger.
On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
3
■ Outside rear view mirror defogger (if equipped)
CAUTION
■ Outside rear view mirror defogger (if equipped)
The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch
them to prevent from burning yourself.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the rear window defogger on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
179
Interior features
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Type A: CD player and AM/FM radio (with CD changer controller)
Type B: CD player and AM/FM radio (with CD changer controller)
180
3-2. Using the audio system
Title
Page
Using the radio
P. 183
Using the CD player
P. 190
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
P. 197
Operating an iPod
P. 206
Operating a USB memory
P. 213
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 221
Using the AUX port
P. 225
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 227
3
The language used for all voice guidance, voice recognition and messages may be changed.
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Press
(MORE).
STEP 3
Press
(LANG).
STEP 4
Press
that corresponds to the desired language.
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
“ENG” (English) or “ESP” (Spanish)
For vehicles sold in Canada
“ENG” (English) or “FRAN” (French)
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
181
Interior features
Language settings (type B only)
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
182
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Type A
Power
Volume
Adjusting the
frequency
Station selector
3
Interior features
Seeking a
frequency
AM/FM
mode buttons
Scanning for receivable stations
Type B
Power
Volume
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)
Station selector
Changing
the channel
category
Seeking a
frequency
Scanning
for receivable
stations
Displaying radio
text messages
AM/FM/SAT mode button
Setting preset buttons
Mute
183
3-2. Using the audio system
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP 1
Search for desired stations by turning
“∨” on
STEP 2
or pressing “∧” or
.
Press and hold the button (from
to
or one of
) the station is to be set to until you hear a beep.
Type B: Each time
is pressed, station pages are changed.
There are a total of 6 pages.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press
once again.
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1
Press
.
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press
once again.
■ Displaying radio text messages (for type B, FM mode only)
When a new radio text message is received, “MSG” is shown on
the display. To display the message, press
If the text continues past the end of the display, “
and hold
until you hear a beep.
Text messages are not displayed while driving.
184
.
” is displayed. Press
3-2. Using the audio system
XM® Satellite Radio (type B only)
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP 1
Press
.
The display changes as follows each time
is pressed.
AM → FM → XM
STEP 2
Turn
to select the desired channel from all categories or
press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired channel in the
3
current category.
Select the desired channel. Press and hold a button (one of
until you hear a beep.
)
■ Changing the channel category
Press “∧” or “∨” on
.
■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning channels in the current category
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
When the desired channel is reached, press
again.
● Scanning preset channels
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2
When the desired channel is reached, press
again.
185
Interior features
■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Displaying text information
Press
Each time
.
is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Title (song/program title) → Name (artist name/feature)/Title (song/program title).
■ Reception sensitivity
● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may
adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted on the rear roof. The antenna can be
removed from the base by turning it.
186
3-2. Using the audio system
■ XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.
● XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. ⎯
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
Canada ⎯
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a
problem. Select “CH000” using
, and the receiver's 8-character ID
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
187
Interior features
number will appear.
3
3-2. Using the audio system
■ If XM® Satellite Radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested
corrective action.
ANTENNA
or
CHECK
ANTENNA
UPDATING
or
CHANNEL NOT
AUTHORIZED
188
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check
whether the XM® antenna cable is attached
securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified
dealer.
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled,
you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air
channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another
channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM® Satellite Radio.
NO SIGNAL
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
LOADING
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR
or
CHANNEL OFF
AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any
programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at this time. No
action needed.
3-2. Using the audio system
--or
CHANNEL NOT
AVAILABLE
The channel you selected is no longer available.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to
the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not
change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada).
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases.
● The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.
● A cover will be put on the roof.
189
Interior features
■ FCC WARNING
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Type A
Power
Volume
Reverse
Fast-forward
CD eject
Repeat play
Selecting a track
Random playback
Search playback
Displaying text
messages
Playback
Type B
Power
Volume
Selector buttons
Selecting a track
CD eject
Selecting a
track/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding
190
Playback
Searching playback
Displaying text
messages
Playback/pause
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading CDs
■ Loading a CD
Insert a CD.
Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD
Press
and remove the CD.
Selecting a track
Press “∧” to move up or “∨” to move down using
until the desired
Interior features
track number is displayed.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Type A
Press
(reverse) or
(fast-forward).
Type B
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on
.
Scanning tracks
STEP 1
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press
STEP 2
Press
3
again.
again when the desired track is reached.
191
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a CD (with a CD changer)
■ Selecting a CD to play
or
Press
.
■ Scanning loaded CDs
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press
STEP 2
Press
again.
again when the desired CD is reached.
Playing and pausing tracks (type B only)
Press
.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a track
Press
(RPT) or
(RPT).
To cancel, press the button once more (without a CD changer), or twice
more (with a CD changer).
■ Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (with a CD changer)
Type A
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type B
Press
(RPT) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
192
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback
■ Current CD
Press
(RAND) or
(RDM).
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button once more (without a CD changer), or twice
more (with a CD changer).
■ All CDs (with a CD changer)
Type A
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order.
3
To cancel, press the button again.
Press
Interior features
Type B
(RDM) twice.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button again.
Switching the display
Press
Each time
.
is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Type A: Track no./Elapsed time → CD title → Track name.
Type B: Track title → Track name/Artist name → Track name/Elapsed
time.
193
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
for 1 second
or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for
6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press
or
. Contact your Toyota
dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on the recording format or disc
features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
194
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7
in. (12 cm)
3
● Low-quality and deformed CDs
Interior features
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CDR labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
195
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a
time.
196
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Power
Volume
Fast-forward
Selecting a file
Reverse
CD eject
3
Playback
Repeat play
Searching playback
Random playback
Interior features
Selecting a file
Selecting a folder
Displaying text messages
Type B
Power
Volume
Selecting a file
Selector buttons
CD eject
Selecting a file/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding
Playback/pause
Playback
Searching playback
Selecting a
folder and
file
Displaying text
messages
197
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 191
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs (with a CD changer)
→P. 192
Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired folder.
■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2
When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold “∨” on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press
.
When the desired file is reached, press
198
once again.
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
Type A
Press
(fast-forward).
(reverse) or
Type B
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on
.
Playing and pausing files (type B only)
Press
.
3
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT) or
(RPT).
To cancel, press the button once more (without a CD changer), or twice
more (with a CD changer).
■ Repeating all of the files in a folder
Type A
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type B
Press
(RPT) twice.
To cancel, press the button once more (without a CD changer), or twice
more (with a CD changer).
■ Repeating all of the files on a disc (type B with a CD changer)
Press
(RPT) three times.
To cancel, press the same button again.
199
Interior features
Repeat play
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback
■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Press
(RAND) or
(RDM).
To cancel, press the button once more (without a CD changer), or twice
more (with a CD changer).
■ Playing all of the files on a disc in random order
Type A
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type B
Press
(RDM) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Switching the display
Press
Each time
.
is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Type A: Folder no./File no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name →
Album title (MP3 only) → Track title → Artist name.
Type B: Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name
(MP3 only) → Track title/Elapsed time.
200
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
→P. 194
■ Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not included in the CD.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press
or
. Contact your Toyota
dealer if the CD still cannot be played.
■ Discs that can be used
3
■ CD player protection feature
→P. 194
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
→P. 194
■ Lens cleaners
→P. 194
201
Interior features
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
202
3-2. Using the audio system
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CDRWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
3
Interior features
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
203
3-2. Using the audio system
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc. In some cases, playback may not
be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
204
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs that cannot be used (→P. 195)
■ CD player precautions (→P. 196)
3
Interior features
205
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod∗
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■ Connecting an iPod
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
STEP 2
Press
.
∗: If equipped
206
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Control panel
Power
Volume
Selector knob
Selector buttons
3
Playback
Interior features
Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding
Displaying text
messages
Playback/pause
207
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a play mode
STEP 1
Press
(BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.
STEP 2
Press
that corresponds to the desired play mode.
Pressing
(MORE) to change to the second selection list.
■ Play mode list
Play mode
First
selection
Second
selection
PLIST
Playlist
select
Songs
select
ARTIST
Artist select
Albums
select
ALBUM
Albums
select
Songs
select
GENRE
Genre select
Artists select
SONGS
Songs
select
PODCST
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
-
-
Songs
select
-
-
-
Albums
select
Songs
select
-
-
-
Albums
select
Songs
select
-
-
COMPSR
Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs
select
-
BOOK
Songs
select
-
-
-
Depending on the model, the name of your iPod may be displayed at
the top of the list.
208
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Selecting a list
STEP 1
Turn
to display the first selection list.
STEP 2
Press
STEP 3
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.
to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press
(
).
Selecting songs from a song list
STEP 1
Press
3
(LIST).
STEP 2
Turn
Pressing
Interior features
The current playlist is displayed.
to select the desired song.
returns the screen from list display to the previous
screen.
209
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting songs
Turn
or press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired song.
Playing and pausing songs
Press
.
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on
.
Shuffle playback
■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press
(RDM).
To cancel, press the button twice.
■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press
(RDM) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press the button again.
Even when the repeat play option has not been selected, playback will
automatically continue from the first song in the current play list once the
last song has ended.
210
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time
■ About iPod
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
● iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
3
■ iPod functions
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve some malfunctions.
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.
■ Error messages
“iPod ERROR”:
This indicates a problem in the iPod, inside the
USB box or the connection between them.
“NO SONGS”:
This indicates that there is no music data in the
iPod.
“UPDATE YOUR iPod”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not
compatible.
211
Interior features
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod
mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Compatible models
Model
Generation
Software version
iPod
5th generation
Ver. 1.2.0 or higher
iPod nano
1st generation
Ver. 1.3.0 or higher
2nd generation
Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
3rd generation
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
iPod touch
1st generation
Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
iPod classic
1st generation
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some
models listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this
system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in a device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in a device: 65025
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65025
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect the iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
212
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory∗
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
■ Connecting a USB memory
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect a USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.
3
Press
Interior features
STEP 2
.
∗: If equipped
213
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Control panel
Power
Volume
Selector knob
Selector buttons
Selecting a
track/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding
214
Selecting
a folder
and file
Playback
Searching playback
Displaying text
messages
Playback/pause
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting a folder
Press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired folder.
■ Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold “∨” on
until you hear a beep.
■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
3
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Interior features
STEP 2
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting a file
Turn
or press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired file.
■ Scanning the files in a folder
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press
again.
When the desired file is reached, press
again.
Playing and pausing files
Press
.
215
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on
.
Random playback
■ Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
(RDM).
To cancel, press the button twice.
■ Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press
(RDM) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press the button twice.
■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press
(RPT) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time
216
3-2. Using the audio system
■ USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it
once again may resolve some malfunctions.
■ Error messages
“USB ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the USB memory or
inside the USB box or connection between them.
“NO SUPPORT”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory.
■ USB memory
● Compatible device
3
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
Depending on the type of USB device, playback may not be possible.
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
•
•
•
•
Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
Maximum number of folder in device: 999 (including the root)
Maximum number of files in device: 65025
Maximum number of files per folder: 255
217
Interior features
● Compatible device formats
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
218
3-2. Using the audio system
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is plugged in, all files in the
USB memory device are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the
first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
3
● Extensions
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not use a USB memory, or connect a USB memory.
219
Interior features
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to a USB memory
● Do not leave a USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
220
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Type A
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
3
Selector buttons
Interior features
Type B
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
Menu button
221
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the audio control function
■ Changing sound quality modes
Type A
Pressing
selects the mode to be changed in the following
order.
“BAS”→“TRE”→“FAD”→“BAL”→“ASL”
Type B
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Press
that corresponds to the desired mode.
“BASS”, “TREB”, “FADE”, or “BAL”
■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning
adjusts the level.
Type A
Mode
displayed
Sound quality mode
Level
Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
BAS
Bass*
-5 to 5
TRE
Treble*
-5 to 5
Low
High
FAD
Front/rear
volume
balance
R7 to F7
Shifts to rear
Shifts to
front
BAL
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or
CD mode.
222
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B
Mode
displayed
Sound quality mode
Level
Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
BASS
Bass*
-5 to 5
TREB
Treble*
-5 to 5
Low
High
FADE
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7
Shifts to rear
Shifts to
front
BAL
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio
mode.
Type A
When “ASL” is selected, turning
to the right changes the
amount of “ASL” in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning
to the left turns “ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.
223
Interior features
■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
3
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Press
(MORE).
STEP 3
Press
(ASL).
STEP 4
Press
that corresponds to the desired mode (LOW,
MID, HIGH or OFF).
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according
to vehicle speed.
■ Setting the number of preset pages (type B only)
The number of preset pages desired can be set from 1 to 6. The initial
setting is 6 pages.
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Press
STEP 3
Press
(PRESET).
STEP 4
Press
pages.
that corresponds to the desired number of preset
(MORE).
■ Language settings (type B only)
→P. 181
224
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Type A
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
3
STEP 2
Press
.
Interior features
Type B
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
225
3-2. Using the audio system
STEP 2
Press
.
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
226
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects tracks,
files (MP3 and WMA) and
discs
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode:
Selects files and folders
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
Turning on the power
Press
when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding
beep.
down until you hear a
227
Interior features
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects tracks and
albums
3
3-2. Using the audio system
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time
is pressed.
Type A
FM→CD→CD changer (with a CD changer)→AUX→AM
Type B
FM→SAT→CD→CD changer (with a CD changer)
→AUX→USB/iPod→Bluetooth® Audio→AM
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on
to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-
ume.
Press and hold
to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2
Press
to select a preset station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold
beep.
228
until you hear a
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1
Press
to select CD, iPod, USB memory or Bluetooth®
audio mode.
STEP 2
Press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired track/file or song.
Selecting a folder or album
to select CD, USB memory or Bluetooth® audio
STEP 1
Press
mode.
STEP 2
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on
until you hear a beep.
3
STEP 1
Press
to select CD mode.
STEP 2
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on
until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
229
Interior features
Selecting a disc in the CD player (CD player with changer only)
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system∗
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on
a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Title
®
Using the Bluetooth audio system
®
Page
P. 233
Operating a Bluetooth enabled portable player
P. 239
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
P. 241
®
Bluetooth audio system setup
P. 246
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the portable player is switched off
● If the portable player is not connected
● If the portable player’s battery is low
● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the portable player
∗: If equipped
230
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (→P. 273)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ Compatible models
3
● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.2
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.
1.3 or higher recommended)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: L2C0045TR
IC ID: 3432A-0045TR
MADE IN MEXICO
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
231
Interior features
● Following Profiles:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC/
IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more
between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
232
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Audio unit
Display
Track title, Artist name,
Album name, Elapsed time,
“Streaming Audio”, etc. is
displayed.
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth-Audio
tion condition
connec-
233
Interior features
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio system
cannot be used.
3
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Microphone
Vehicles with moon roof
Vehicles without moon roof
234
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without the need to check the display or operate
.
■ Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
235
Interior features
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio setup
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
3
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register
a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a portable player:
STEP 1
Press and hold
STEP 2
Press
until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
(SETUP).
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration
instructions are heard.
STEP 3
Select “Pair Audio Players (Pair audio player)” using a voice
command or
STEP 4
.
Register a portable player name by either of the following
methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using
, and say the name to
be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
STEP 5
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
236
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
STEP 6
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. (→P. 256)
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
First menu
Second
menu
Setup
(Setup)
System
Setup
Operation details
Pair Audio
Players (Pair
audio player)
Registering a portable player
Select Audio
Player
Selecting a portable player to
be used
Change Name
Changing the registered
name of a portable player
List Audio
Players
Listing the registered portable players
Set Passkey
Changing the passkey
Delete Audio
Player
Deleting a registered portable player
Guidance Volume
Setting voice guidance volume
Device Name
Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
Reset Setting
Initializing the system
“BT Audio Setup” can be canceled by pressing the on-hook switch or
saying the voice command, “Cancel”.
237
3
Interior features
BT Audio
Setup
(BT audio
setup)
Third menu
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations where the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
● Registering a portable player to the system
■ Changing the passkey
→P. 244
238
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Power
Volume
Selector knob
Selecting
an album
Playback
Displaying text
messages
Playback/pause
Interior features
Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding
and reversing
3
Selecting an album
Press “∨” or “∧” on
.
Selecting tracks
Press “∧” or “∨” on
.
Playing and pausing tracks
Press
.
239
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on
.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time
Using the steering wheel audio switches
→P. 227
■ Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
240
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:
■ Functions and operation procedures
STEP 1
Press and hold
STEP 2
Press
STEP 3
Select one of the following functions using a voice command or
until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
(SETUP).
.
● Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Players (Pair audio player)”
3
Interior features
● Selecting a portable player to be used
“Select Audio Player”
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
“Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players”
● Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player”
241
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Players (Pair audio player)” using a voice command or
, and perform the procedure for registering a portable
player. (→P. 236)
Selecting a portable player to be used
STEP 1
Select “Select Audio Player” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Select the portable player to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List audio players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
242
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
STEP 3
Press the talk switch and say “From car” or “From audio”, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
If “From car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically
connected whenever the engine switch is in either the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
Changing the registered name of a portable player
STEP 1
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Select the name of the portable player to be changed by
either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List audio players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
STEP 3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
,
and say the new name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
243
3
Interior features
voice command or
.
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players” using a voice command or
. The list
of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT Audio Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being
read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will
become available:
● Selecting a portable player: “Select Audio Player”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player”
Changing the passkey
STEP 1
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or
STEP 3
.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press
244
.
again.
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting a registered portable player
STEP 1
Select “Delete Audio Player” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone,
the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.
A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
STEP 3
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
■ The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
245
3
Interior features
b. Press the talk switch and say “List audio players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system setup
■ System setup items and operation procedures
→P. 271
246
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) features∗
This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and
the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
■ Hands-free system quick guide
STEP 1
Setting a cellular phone. (→P. 252)
STEP 2
Adding an entry to the phonebook (Up to 20 names can be
stored). (→P. 275)
STEP 3
Dialing by inputting a name. (→P. 262)
3
Interior features
∗: If equipped
247
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
248
Title
Page
Using the hands-free phone system
■ Operating the system using a voice
command
■ Using the hands-free phone system for
the first time
■ Menu list of the hands-free phone
system
P. 252
Making a phone call
■ Dialing by inputting a number
■ Dialing by inputting a name
■ Speed dialing
■ When receiving a phone call
■ Transferring a phone call
■ Using the call history
P. 262
Setting a cellular phone
■ Registering a cellular phone
■ Selecting a cellular phone to be used
■ Changing a registered name
■ Listing the registered cellular phones
■ Deleting a cellular phone
■ Changing the passkey
■ Turning the hands-free phone
automatic connection on/off
P. 266
Security and system setup
■ Setting or changing the PIN
■ Locking or unlocking the phone book
■ Setting voice guidance volume
■ Initialization
P. 271
Using the phone book
■ Adding a new phone number
■ Setting speed dials
■ Changing a registered name
■ Deleting registered data
■ Deleting speed dials
■ Listing the registered data
P. 275
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the cellular phone is switched off
● If you are outside service range
● If the cellular phone is not connected
● If the cellular phone's battery is low
● If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the cellular phone
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed.
3
■ Required profiles for the cellular phone
Interior features
● HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
● OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
249
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ Certification for the hands-free phone system
FCC ID: L2C0045TR
IC ID: 3432A-0045TR
MADE IN MEXICO
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC/
IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more
between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
■ Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
250
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to a cellular phone
Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high resulting in damage to the phone.
3
Interior features
251
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the hands-free phone system∗ (for cellular phone)
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters, such as
an umlaut, cannot be displayed.
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection condition and reception level
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.
∗: If equipped
252
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Steering wheel telephone switches
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted using this
button.
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a
call
253
Interior features
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Microphone
Vehicles with moon roof
Vehicles without moon roof
254
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Operating the system using a voice command
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without the need to check the display or operate
.
■ Operation procedure when using a voice command
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using a voice command
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
255
Interior features
“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register
a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be
entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular
phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular
phone:
STEP 1
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions
are heard.
STEP 2
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or
STEP 3
Register a phone name by either of the following methods.
a. Select “Record Name” using
.
, and say a name to be
registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.
Voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
STEP 4
256
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Registration to the hands-free phone system only
STEP 5
Select “Phone Only” using a voice command or
.
Registration to the hands-free phone system and Bluetooth® audio
system at the same time
STEP 5
Select “Int. Audio (Internal audio)” using a voice command or
.
STEP 6
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
3
STEP 7
Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
257
Interior features
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■ Normal operation
Second
menu
Third menu
CallBack
(Call
back)
-
-
Dialing a number stored in
the incoming call history
memory
Redial
-
-
Dialing a number stored in
the outgoing call history
memory
Dial by
number
-
-
Dialing by inputting a number
Dial by
Name
(Dial by
name)
-
-
Dialing by inputting a name
registered in the phone book
Add Entry
-
Adding a new number
Change
Name
-
Changing a name in the
phone book
Delete
Entry
-
Deleting the phone book
data
Delete
Speed
Dial
-
Deleting a registered speed
dial
List
Names
-
Listing the phone book data
Speed
Dial
(Set
speed
dial)
-
Registering a speed dial
First menu
Phonebook
258
Operation detail
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
First menu
Second
menu
Setup
(Setup)
Phone
Setup
System
Setup
Operation detail
Set PIN
Setting a PIN code
Phonebook Lock
(Phone book
lock)
Locking the phone book
Phonebook
Unlock (Phone
book unlock)
Unlocking the phone book
Pair Phone
Registering the cellular
phone to be used
Change Phone
Name (Change
name)
Changing a registered name
of a cellular phone
3
Delete Phone
Deleting a registered cellular
phone
List phones
Listing the registered cellular
phones
Select phone
Selecting a cellular phone to
be used
Interior features
Security
Third menu
Set Passkey
Changing the passkey
Handsfree
Power
Turning the Hands-free
power on/off
Guidance Volume
Setting voice guidance volume
Device Name
Displaying a device’s information
Reset Setting
Initialization
259
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Using a short cut key
First menu
Second menu
Operation detail
Dial “XXX (name)”
-
Dialing a number registered
in the phone book
Dial “XXX (number)”
-
Dialing the input numbers
Phone book add
entry
-
Adding a new number
Phone book change
name
-
Changing the name of a
phone number in the phone
book
Phone book delete
entry
-
Deleting phone book data
Phone book set
speed dial
-
Registering a speed dial
Phone book delete
speed dial
-
Deleting a speed dial
Phone book List
names
-
Listing the phone book data
260
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Automatic adjustment of volume
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when
vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
∗ (star), and + (plus).
Say a command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations that the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on a rough road
● When driving at high speeds
3
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
Interior features
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
● Registering a cellular phone to the system
■ Changing the passkey
→P. 269
261
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Making a phone call
■ Making a phone call
● Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
● Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by Name (Dial by name)”
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history
“Redial”
● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history
“CallBack (Callback)”
■ Receiving a phone call
● Answering the phone
● Refusing the call
■ Transferring a phone call
■ Using the call history
● Dialing
● Storing data in the phone book
● Deleting
Dialing by inputting a number
STEP 1
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
STEP 2
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
STEP 3
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using
262
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Dialing by inputting a name
STEP 1
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
STEP 2
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List names”. Press the talk
switch while the desired name is being read aloud.
STEP 3
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
3
c. Select “Dial” using
.
STEP 1
Press the off-hook switch.
STEP 2
Press the preset button to which the desired number is registered.
STEP 3
Press the off-hook switch.
When receiving a phone call
■ Answering the phone
Press the off-hook switch.
■ Refusing the call
Press the on-hook switch.
263
Interior features
Speed dialing
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2.
*1:
This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the cellular phone to the system during a call.
*2:
While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from
the system to the cellular phone. Also, this operation is invalid
while dialing or receiving a call.
Using the call history
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history:
STEP 1
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing call history) or “Call back” (when using
a number stored in the incoming call history).
STEP 2
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.
b. Select the desired number using
264
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice
command or
.
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” using a voice
command or
.
Deleting: Select “Delete” using a voice command or
.
3
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk at the same time as the other party.
● Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
265
Interior features
■ Call history
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered cellular phones:
■ Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
:
● Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Pair Phone”
● Selecting the cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Select Phone”
● Changing a registered name
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Change Phone
Name (Change name)”
● Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “List Phones”
● Deleting a cellular phone
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Delete Phone”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Set Passkey”
● Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Handsfree
Power”
Registering a cellular phone
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or
, and perform
the procedure for registering a cellular phone. (→P. 256)
266
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
STEP 1
Select “Select Phone” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
STEP 2
Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name.
Pattern B
STEP 2
Select the cellular phone to be used using
.
Changing a registered name
STEP 1
Select “Change Phone Name (Change name)” using a voice
command or
.
267
3
Interior features
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
STEP 2
Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either
of the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the
desired phone name is being read aloud, press the talk
switch.
c. Select the desired phone name using
STEP 3
.
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
,
and say a new name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
Listing the registered cellular phones
Selecting “List Phones” using a voice command or
causes the
list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being
read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be
available:
• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”
268
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Deleting a cellular phone
STEP 1
Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone.
Changing the passkey
STEP 1
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or
.
.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press
again.
269
3
Interior features
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
■ Turning off the automatic connection
STEP 1
Select “Handsfree Power” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Select “Turn off” using a voice command or
.
.
■ Turning on the automatic connection
STEP 1
Select “Handsfree Power” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Select “Turn on” using a voice command or
■ The number of cellular phones that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.
270
.
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Security and system setup
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
■ Security setting items and operation procedure
● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Set PIN”
● Locking the phone book
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Lock
(Phone book lock)”
● Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Unlock
(Phone book unlock)”
3
■ System setup items and operation procedure
● Initialization
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Reset Settings”
can only be used for system setup operation.
Setting or changing the PIN
■ Setting a PIN
STEP 1
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Enter a PIN using a voice command or
When using
.
.
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
271
Interior features
● Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Guidance Volume”
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Changing the PIN
STEP 1
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or
STEP 3
Enter a new PIN using a voice command or
When using
.
.
.
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
STEP 1
Select “Phonebook Lock (Phone book lock)” or “Phonebook
Unlock (Phone book unlock)” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using
272
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting voice guidance volume
STEP 1
Select “Guidance Vol” using
.
STEP 2
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
To increase the volume: Turn
counterclockwise.
clockwise.
3
Initialization
Select “Reset Settings” and then “Confirm” using
STEP 2
Select “Confirm” using
Interior features
STEP 1
.
.
273
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Initialization
● The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered cellular phone data
• Security code
● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored
to its original state.
■ When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
● Dialing by inputting a name
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
● Using the phone book
274
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the phone book
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
● Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Add Entry”
● Setting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)”
● Changing a registered name
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Change Name”
● Deleting registered data
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Entry”
● Deleting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Speed Dial”
3
Interior features
● Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “List Names”
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
● Inputting a phone number using a voice command
● Transferring data from the cellular phone
● Inputting a phone number using
● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
275
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■ Adding procedure
STEP 1
Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
Inputting a telephone number using a voice command
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice (By voice)” using a voice command
or
.
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice
command or
.
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for
the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data using
276
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Inputting a phone number using
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using
.
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using
, and press
once again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing Call History (Outgoing)” or “Incoming Call History (Incoming)” using a voice command
or
.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data
is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data using
.
277
Interior features
.
3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
STEP 3
Select the name to be registered by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using
, and say the desired
name.
STEP 4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
In STEP 3 , selecting “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
Setting speed dials
STEP 1
Select “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)” using a voice command
or
STEP 2
.
Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of
the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch, say desired number, and select “Con.
firm” using a voice command or
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
c. Select the desired data using
278
.
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
STEP 3
Select the desired preset button, and register the data into
speed dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” using
a voice command or
.
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
Changing a registered name
STEP 1
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Select the name to be changed by either of the following
methods.
firm” using a voice command or
.
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
c. Select the desired name using
.
.
STEP 3
Select “Record Name” with
STEP 4
Say a new name, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
or the talk switch.
.
279
Interior features
a. Press the talk switch, say desired name, and select “Con-
3
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Deleting registered data
STEP 1
Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or
.
STEP 2
Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired
phone number to be deleted.
b. Press the talk switch, say “List phones”. While the name of
the desired phone number is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Deleting speed dials
STEP 1
Select “Delete Speed Dial” using a voice command or
STEP 2
Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
280
.
.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Listing the registered data
Selecting “List names” using a voice command causes a list of the
registered data to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud
selects the data, and the following function will be available.
•
•
•
•
Dialing: “Dial”
Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
Setting a speed dial: “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)”
3
■ Limitation of number of digits
Interior features
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
281
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Personal/interior lights or personal lights (→P. 284, 285)
Interior lights (→P. 283)
282
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior light
■ Illuminated entry system
Vehicles with moon roof
When the light switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior lights and personal/interior lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch
position, whether the doors are locked/unlocked (with power door lock system) and whether the doors are open/closed.
Vehicles without moon roof
When the light switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the doors
are locked/unlocked (with power door lock system) and whether the doors
are open/closed.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
3
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 472)
Interior light
“DOOR” position
Off
On
283
Interior features
If the interior lights and personal/interior lights (vehicles with moon roof)
remain on when the door is not fully closed and the light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
3-5. Using the interior lights
Personal/interior lights
Personal/interior lights (vehicles with moon roof)
■ Interior lights
“DOOR” position
Off
On
■ Personal lights
On/off
284
3-5. Using the interior lights
Personal lights
Personal lights (vehicles without moon roof)
On/off
3
Interior features
285
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Bottle holders
Cup holders
Console box
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
286
3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box and console box
Glove box
Pull up the lever.
CAUTION
3
■ Caution while driving
Interior features
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Console box
Lift the lid while pulling the lever.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
287
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Cup holders
Front
Rear
Pull the lid to open.
■ Using the cup holder (front) to store small items
Remove the holders.
288
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
■ Adjusting the cup holder to the size of the cups or drink-cans
Remove the holder and change the
holder position.
Small size
Middle size
Large size
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the rear cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
289
3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders
Bottle holders
Front
Rear
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than pet bottles in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
290
3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes
NOTICE
■ When a pet bottle is in the front bottle holder (vehicles with manual
window)
As there is a possibility of interfering with
a manual window regulator handle, prevent the window from opening and closing, do not place a pet bottle in the holder
when turning the handle.
3
Auxiliary boxes
Interior features
Front
Pull up the lever.
Overhead console (vehicles with moon roof)
Push the lid.
291
3-6. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ Items unsuitable for storing (overhead console only)
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.
292
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and
swing to the side.
3
Interior features
293
3-7. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover.
294
3-7. Other interior features
Clock
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds
hour.*
to
the
nearest
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00
■ The clock is displayed when
3
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Interior features
295
3-7. Other interior features
Ashtrays∗
An ashtray can be installed in
a cup holder.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
∗: If equipped
296
3-7. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter∗
Push the
down.
cigarette
lighter
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
3
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
∗: If equipped
297
Interior features
CAUTION
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlet∗
The power outlet can be used for a following component.
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
115 V: Accessories that uses less than 100 W.
Type A (12 V)
Type B (115 V)
■ The power outlet can be used when
12 V
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
115 V
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
∗: If equipped
298
3-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
115 V
Do not use a 115 V appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 115 V appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection
circuit will cut the power supply.
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (115 V)
The following 115 V appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W.
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
299
Interior features
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
3
3-7. Other interior features
Grocery bag hook
This hook is designed to hang things like grocery bag.
Cabin
Press the hook.
Luggage compartment
300
3-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ Grocery bag hook weight capacity
Cabin
Do not hang any object heavier than 44 lb. (20 kg) on the grocery bag hook.
Luggage compartment
Do not hang any object heavier than 7 lb. (3 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.
3
Interior features
301
3-7. Other interior features
Seatback table∗
Front passenger's seatback can be used as a temporary table only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Fold down the front passenger's seat to use the seatback
table. (→P. 38)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions to avoid death or serious injury.
● Do not set up the seatback table.
● Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback table.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the seatback table
Do not put heavy loads on the table.
∗: If equipped
302
3-7. Other interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
The shape of the retaining
hooks (clips) and the fixing
procedure of the floor mat for
your vehicle may differ from
those shown in the illustration.
For details, refer to the floor
mat retention clip installation
instructions supplied with the
clips.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■ When installing the driver's floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the right place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after
cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N
(manual transmission), fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make sure it
does not interfere with the floor mat.
303
Interior features
CAUTION
3
3-7. Other interior features
Luggage compartment feature
■ Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■ Tie-down belts
To tighten
To loosen
To hook
To unhook
304
3-7. Other interior features
■ Auxiliary boxes
Turn the knobs to the
“UNLOCK”
position,
and
remove the deck boards.
3
Interior features
305
3-7. Other interior features
■ Grocery bag hooks (→P. 300)
■ Tonneau cover (if equipped)
STEP 1
Remove the deck board.
STEP 2
Take out the bag.
STEP 3
Remove the tonneau cover
from the bag.
306
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 4
Slowly unfold the tonneau
cover.
STEP 5
Attach the hook to the hook
brackets.
3
Raise the rear center head
restraint to attach the hook.
307
Interior features
STEP 6
3-7. Other interior features
Folding the tonneau cover
STEP 1
Hold the tonneau cover with both
hands. Point your thumbs in
opposite directions.
STEP 2
Bend one side of the cover
towards you.
STEP 3
Twist the other side in the opposite direction, as shown in the
illustration.
308
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 4
Make a small circle, then fold it
inward.
STEP 5
Make sure the three circles are
side by side.
3
Interior features
STEP 6
Put it in the bag.
309
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When unfolding the tonneau cover
Be careful not to hit yourself when unfolding the tonneau cover.
■ Caution while driving
Keep the deck boards locked.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
310
3-7. Other interior features
Compass∗
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press and hold “AUTO” for 3
seconds.
3
■ Displays and directions
Direction
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
Interior features
Display
∗: If equipped
311
3-7. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according
to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in the illustration, the compass
will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1
STEP 2
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold “AUTO” for 6
seconds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.
STEP 3
Press “AUTO” and, referring to the map above, select the
number of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.
312
3-7. Other interior features
■ Circling calibration
STEP 1
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
STEP 2
Press and hold “AUTO” for 9
seconds.
C appears on the compass display.
STEP 3
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
■ Conditions unfavorable for correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following situations:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking
lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near
an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
313
Interior features
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.
3
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle
is stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the
neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling
calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the anti-glare inside rear
view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
314
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle, do the following.
• Fold the mirrors back.
• Remove the antenna.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle's paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
316
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■ Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
4
Maintenance and care
317
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ If the windshield washer nozzle become blocked
Contact your Toyota dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object.
This may damage the nozzle.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ Antenna installation and removal precautions
● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
318
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
319
4
Maintenance and care
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply
water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical
components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 72)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect
off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
320
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or
alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor
the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part's painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax, on the
upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior
heats up significantly.
4
■ Water on the floor
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
321
Maintenance and care
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and
may also cause the body to rust.
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the
maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
322
4-2. Maintenance
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
After the requred maintenace is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
STEP 1 Turn the engine switch OFF with the trip meter A reading shown.
STEP 2 While pressing the trip meter reset button (→P. 129), turn the
engine switch to the “ON” position.
STEP 3 Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays
000000.
4
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
323
Maintenance and care
● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
4-2. Maintenance
CAUTION
■ Warning in handling of battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (→P. 347)
324
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
Check points
Check the connections.
(→P. 347)
Brake fluid
At the correct level?
(→P. 345)
Engine coolant
At the correct level?
(→P. 343)
Engine oil
At the correct level?
(→P. 339)
Exhaust system
No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(→P. 344)
Washer fluid
At the correct level?
4
Maintenance and care
Battery
(→P. 349)
325
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
326
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free
play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when
applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Clutch pedal
• Moves smoothly?
Head restraints
• Move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Doors
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tires
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
4
Maintenance and care
327
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
328
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine coolant level
Engine oil level
328
Parts and tools
(→P. 347)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
(→P. 345)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
(→P. 343)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
(→P. 339)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel
(used only for adding oil)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Fuses
Parts and tools
(→P. 371)
Radiator and condenser
(→P. 344)
• Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
⎯
Tire inflation pressure (→P. 360)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid
• Water washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
(→P. 349)
4
Maintenance and care
329
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is OFF. With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 344)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in the eyes.
330
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner
Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due
to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
4
Maintenance and care
331
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
STEP 2
Lift the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
STEP 3
Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the
slot.
332
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■ After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■ When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
4
Maintenance and care
333
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
334
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear
2WD models without 18-inch tires
2WD models with 18-inch tires
4
Maintenance and care
AWD models
335
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury.
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustration.
● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported
only by the floor jack.
● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put
the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission).
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath
the floor jack.
336
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
4
Battery
(→P. 347)
Radiator
(→P. 344)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 339)
Electric cooling fan
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 345)
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 343)
Fuse box
Washer fluid tank (→P. 349)
(→P. 371)
Condenser
Maintenance and care
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 340)
(→P. 344)
337
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 343)
Fuse box
(→P. 371)
Battery
(→P. 347)
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 340)
Radiator
(→P. 344)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 339)
Condenser
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 345)
338
Electric cooling fans
(→P. 344)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 349)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,
wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the
bottom of the engine.
STEP 2
Hold a rag under the end and
pull the dipstick out.
4
Wipe the dipstick clean.
STEP 4
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
STEP 5
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
STEP 6
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Low
Full
339
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Low
Full
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil selection
→P. 447
Oil quantity
(Low → Full)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.)
Items
Clean funnel
STEP 1
Remove the oil filler cap.
STEP 2
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
STEP 3
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
340
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per
1000 km)
● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles
(1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
■
4
CAUTION
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
341
Maintenance and care
■ Used engine oil
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
342
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (→P. 433)
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
343
4
Maintenance and care
Visually check the radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain
cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and remove any foreign objects.
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and may cause
burns.
344
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type
Items
Clean funnel
Slide and lift up the rubber strip
to partly remove it as shown.
345
Maintenance and care
STEP 1
4
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Disconnect the claws
remove the service cover.
STEP 3
Remove the reservoir cap.
STEP 4
and
Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level.
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
4
Ground cable
Maintenance and care
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
347
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia,
beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
Washer fluid
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
If any washer does not work, the washer tank may be empty.
STEP 1
Open the lid.
4
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
Add washer fluid.
For vehicles sold in Canada
If any washer does not work or the low windshield washer fluid level
warning light comes on, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer
fluid.
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine
etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and inflation pressure if not
rotated.
■ Tire rotation
4
Front
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
AWD models: Do not fail to
initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire
rotation.
■ The tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that
uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low
tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (→P. 404)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters.
351
Maintenance and care
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota
dealer. (→P. 354)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:
● When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire
inflation pressure.
● When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch
OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (→P. 454)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.
STEP 3
STEP 4
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
4
Maintenance and care
STEP 5
Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in the “ON” position, and then turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
353
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your
Toyota dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has
failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not flash 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20
minutes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Maximum load of tire
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (→P. 460)
■ Low profile tires (models not equipped with 16-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains* on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires.
355
4
Maintenance and care
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use
year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 154)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified
level.
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
4
Maintenance and care
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so
may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not
mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is
low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those
specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 352)
■ Driving on rough roads
■ Low profile tires and wheels
Wheels with profile tires like 17- and 18-inch tires may cause greater
damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road
surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
● Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
359
4
Maintenance and care
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the
cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 454)
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
Remove the tire valve cap.
STEP 2
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
STEP 3
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
STEP 4
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level
adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
STEP 6
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
361
Maintenance and care
STEP 5
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride
and handling.
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal
for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
4
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
363
Maintenance and care
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have
been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of
handling control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and
use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Toyota, except for the compact spare tire, are
equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow
the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced,
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed.
(→P. 352)
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious
injury or death.
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
365
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
■ Removal method
STEP 1
Turn the engine switch OFF.
STEP 2
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
STEP 3
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the claws.
STEP 4
Remove the filter cover.
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
4
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
367
Maintenance and care
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Key battery (vehicles with wireless remote control)
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.)
● Lithium battery CR2025
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Remove the cover.
STEP 2
Remove the module.
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Open the case cover using a
flathead
screwdriver
protected with tape etc. and
remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
■ If the key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use CR2025 lithium battery
4
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your
Toyota dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
369
Maintenance and care
● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera
stores.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP 1
Turn the engine switch OFF.
STEP 2
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.
Under the driver’s side instrument panel
4
Remove the lid.
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (→P. 374) for details about which fuse to check.
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Take out the pullout tool.
STEP 4
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout tool.
STEP 5
For type A and B fuses: Remove the fuse.
STEP 6
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment
Fuse
Circuit
1
CDS FAN
30 A
Electric cooling fan(s)
2
RDI FAN
40 A
Electric cooling fan(s)
3
ABS NO. 3
30 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
4
ABS NO. 1
50 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
5
HTR
50 A
Air conditioning system
120 A
Charging system, RDI FAN, CDS
FAN, ABS NO. 1, ABS NO. 3, PWR
OUTLET/ INVERTER, HTR, HTR
SUB NO. 1, HTR SUB NO. 3, ACC,
CIG, ECU-IG NO. 2, HTR-IG,
WIPER, RR WIPER, WASHER,
ECU-IG NO. 1, AM1, 4WD, DOOR,
STOP, FR DOOR, POWER, RR
DOOR, RL DOOR, OBD, ACC-B,
FR FOG, SUNROOF, DEF, MIR
HTR, TAIL, PANEL
6
374
Ampere
ALT
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
EPS
60 A
Electric power steering
8
P/I
50 A
EFI MAIN, HORN, IG2
9
H-LP MAIN
50 A
H-LP LH LO, H-LP RH LO, H-LP
LH HI, H-LP RH HI
10
EFI NO. 2
10 A
Emission control system
11
EFI NO. 1
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
12
H-LP RH HI
10 A
Right-hand headlight (high beam)
13
H-LP LH HI
10 A
Left-hand headlight (high beam)
14
H-LP RH LO
10 A
Right-hand headlight (low beam)
15
H-LP LH LO
10 A
Left-hand headlight (low beam)
16
ETCS
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
17
TURN-HAZ
10 A
Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers
18
ALT-S
7.5 A
Charging system
19
AM2 NO. 2
7.5 A
Starting system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
20
AM2
30 A
Starting system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
21
STRG LOCK
20 A
No circuit
22
IG2 NO.2
7.5 A
Starting system
23
ECU-B2
10 A
PTC heater
24
ECU-B
10 A
Main body ECU, gauge and
meters, daytime running light system
25
RAD NO. 1
15 A
Audio system
4
Maintenance and care
7
375
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
26
DOME
10 A
Interior lights, personal light, clock,
wireless remote control
27
SPARE
10 A
Spare fuse
28
SPARE
30 A
Spare fuse
29
SPARE
20 A
Spare fuse
30
AMP
30 A
No circuit
31
MAYDAY
10 A
No circuit
32
EFI MAIN
20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO. 1, EFI NO. 2
33
HORN
10 A
Horn
34
IG2
15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system, IGN,
METER
35
HTR SUB
NO. 1
30 A
PTC heater
36
HTR SUB
NO. 3
30 A
PTC heater
37
PWR OUTLET/
INVERTER
15 A
Power outlet
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Under the driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
TAIL
10 A
2
PANEL
7.5 A
Switch illumination
3
FR DOOR
20 A
Power windows, electric moon roof
4
RL DOOR
20 A
Power windows
5
RR DOOR
20 A
Power windows
6
SUNROOF
20 A
Electric moon roof
7
CIG
15 A
Cigarette lighter, power outlet
8
ACC
7.5 A
Outside rear view mirrors, audio
system, main body ECU, clock,
shift lock control system
9
MIR HTR
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, outside rear view mirror
heaters
10
PWR OUTLET
15 A
No circuit
4
Maintenance and care
1
Parking lights, tail lights, license
plate lights, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, instrument cluster
lights
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
11
IGN
7.5 A
SRS airbag system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, front
passenger occupant classification
system
12
METER
7.5 A
Gauge and meters
13
HTR-IG
10 A
Air conditioning system, rear window defogger, PTC heater
14
WIPER
25 A
Windshield wipers
15
RR WIPER
15 A
Rear window wiper
16
WASHER
15 A
Windshield washer
17
ECU-IG NO. 1
10 A
Main body ECU, electric power
steering, electric cooling fan(s),
shift lock control system, anti-lock
brake system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, tire pressure
warning system, vehicle stability
control system, all wheel drive system
18
ECU-IG NO. 2
10 A
Back-up lights, charging system,
rear window defogger, auto antiglare inside rear view mirror
19
OBD
7.5 A
On-board diagnosis system
20
STOP
10 A
Stop lights, high mounted stoplight, anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system,
multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, shift lock control system
21
DOOR
25 A
Power door lock system
22
ACC-B
25 A
CIG, ACC
23
4WD
7.5 A
All wheel drive system
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
24
FR FOG
15 A
Front fog lights
25
AM1
7.5 A
Starting system, shift lock control
system
26
DEF
30 A
Rear window defogger, MIR HTR
27
POWER
30 A
Power windows
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacing. (→P. 380)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
4
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer, as soon as possible.
379
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 456)
■ Front bulb locations
Headlight low beams
Front turn signal/parking
and front side marker lights
Headlight high beams
and daytime running
lights
Front fog lights (if equipped)
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Stop/tail and rear
side marker lights
4
Maintenance and care
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight low beams
STEP 1
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 2
Unplug the bulb while depressing the lock release.
■ Headlight high beams and daytime running lights
STEP 1
382
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Unplug the bulb while depressing the lock release.
■ Front fog lights (if equipped)
STEP 1
Remove the fender liner bolts
and clip.
4
Partly remove the fender liner.
STEP 3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Unplug the bulb while depressing the lock release.
■ Front turn signal/parking and front side marker lights
STEP 1
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 2
Remove the light bulb.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Stop/tail and rear side marker lights, rear turn signal lights
and back-up lights
STEP 1
Open the back door.
Left side
STEP 2
Remove the cover.
Right side (type A)
STEP 2
Remove the cover using the flathead screwdriver.
Right side (type B)
STEP 2
Remove the cover.
385
4
Maintenance and care
To protect the cover, place a rag
between the flathead screwdriver
and the cover.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
STEP 4
Remove the light bulb.
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ License plate lights
STEP 1
Open the back door and remove
the cover.
To protect the cover, place a rag
between the flathead screwdriver
and the cover, as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4
Remove the light bulb.
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
■ LED high mounted stoplight
The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of
the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have
the light replaced.
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ Removing and installing the fender liner clip
Removing
Installing
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately
after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
388
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
390
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
2WD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from
the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions. (→P. 393, 396)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
AWD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a
towing dolly. (→P. 393, 396)
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
5
When trouble arises
391
5-1. Essential information
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Towing eyelet
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Towing eyelet
392
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front (2WD models)
Release the parking brake.
5
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
393
When trouble arises
From the front (AWD models)
5-1. Essential information
From the rear
Automatic transmission: Use a
towing dolly under the front
wheels.
Manual transmission: We recommend to use a towing dolly under
the front wheels.
When not using a towing dolly,
turn the engine switch to the
“ACC” position and shift the shift
lever to N.
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
■ Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine
running) position.
394
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always
be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
5
When trouble arises
395
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Active
Torque Control 4WD system (AWD models) when towing using a
wheel-lift type truck (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from
the rear with the front wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious damage
to the transmission. If towing from the
rear, use a towing dolly.
AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with
any of the wheels on the ground. This
may cause serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Control 4WD
system. Use a towing dolly.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
● Vehicles with a manual transmission: Do not tow the vehicle when the
engine switch is in the “LOCK” position or the key is removed.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
■ Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.)
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Never dinghy tow your vehicle to
prevent causing serious damage to the Active Torque Control 4WD system
(AWD models) and transmission. (→P. 167)
396
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
5
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
397
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
STEP 1
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
STEP 2
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
398
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects
of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining
optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event
data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car
crash event.
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a
near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
● Engine speed
● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
● Vehicle speed
● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
● Position of the transmission shift lever
5
● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
When trouble arises
● Driver's seat position
● SRS airbag deployment data
● SRS airbag system diagnostic data
● Front passenger's occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of
improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders,
the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between
passengers.
399
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for
a leased vehicle) is obtained
● Officially requested by the police or other authorities
● Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
● Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Toyota will:
● Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance
● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed
necessary
● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes
400
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn
on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
5
When trouble arises
401
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
(if equipped).
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
402
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
Warning light/Details
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
(Canada)
Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system.
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system; or
• The TRAC system.
(Flashes)
(AWD models)
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
Active Torque Control 4WD system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the Active Torque Control 4WD
system.
5
When trouble arises
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
403
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly
hold and operate it using more force than usual.
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
(on the instrument cluster)
(on the center
panel)
(Canada)
404
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door is not
fully closed.
Check that all doors are
closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 2.0 gal. (7.5
L, 1.6 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passenger to fasten his or her
seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Low windshield washer
fluid level warning light
Low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Maintenance required
reminder light*3
Indicates that maintenance
is required according to the
driven distance on the maintenance shedule.
(U.S.A.)
Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for
about 15 seconds approximately 4500 miles (7200
km) after the maintenance
data has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km) after
the maintenance data has
been reset.
(The indicator will not work
properly unless the maintenance data has been reset.)
Perform the necessary
maintenance.
Please reset the maintenance data after the maintenance is performed.
See page “Reset the maintenance data”
Tire pressure warning
light (if equipped)
5
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system.
Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
*1:Open door warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) with any
door open.
*2:Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzers:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts warning buzzers sound to alert
the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The
405
When trouble arises
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the
buzzer will sound at a different tone for 20 more seconds.
*3:Maintenance required reminder light:
Refer to the seperate “Scheduled Maintenace Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (→P. 71)
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
406
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire
inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few
minutes.
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used.
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby.
5
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings.
● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used.
407
When trouble arises
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features →P. 472) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passenger that the seat belts are not fastened.
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired
by the nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
408
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
409
5
When trouble arises
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
410
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack
Jack
handle
5
When trouble arises
Spare tire
Wheel
nut
wrench
411
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
STEP 1
Turn the knobs to the “UNLOCK”
position and remove the deck
board.
STEP 2
Detach the hook.
412
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
STEP 1
Turn the knobs to the “UNLOCK”
position and remove the deck
boards.
STEP 2
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
5
When trouble arises
413
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Lefthand
side
Behind the
rear righthand side
tire
Righthand
side
Behind the
rear lefthand side
tire
Lefthand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Righthand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
Front
Rear
STEP 2
Wheel
chock positions
Vehicles with a steel wheel,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.
414
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
STEP 4
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are
located under the rocker panel.
They indicate the jack point
positions.
5
When trouble arises
415
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 5
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 6
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
416
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
STEP 1
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, and the tire may
come off the vehicle.
STEP 2
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Replacing a steel wheel with a compact spare tire
Tapered portion
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Disc wheel
seat
5
Tapered portion
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Disc wheel
seat
417
When trouble arises
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a compact spare tire
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
Lower the vehicle.
STEP 4
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
Stowing the flat tire
STEP 1
418
Vehicles with aluminum wheel:
Before stowing the flat tire,
remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the
reveres side.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 2
Put the flat tire on the deck
boards with the outer side of the
wheel facing up. Hook the belt
clips closest to the buckles onto
the front cargo hooks.
STEP 3
Pass the belts through the center
hole of the wheel.
STEP 4
Hook the other side of the clips
of the belts to the rear hooks.
5
Position the tire edge against the
rear center end of the luggage
compartment.
419
When trouble arises
STEP 5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Pull the ends of the belts to
secure the tire.
STEP 6
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire.
(→P. 454)
■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires.
STEP 1
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
STEP 2
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.
STEP 3
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■ After completing the tire change (vehicles with tire pressure warn-
ing system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 352)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure
warning light comes on, the light remains on.
420
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to
the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by a jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
5
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
421
When trouble arises
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury:
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a
serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or
wheel nuts.
● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and
the wheel may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death
or serious injury.
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for
use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another
vehicle.
● Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp
cornering.
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
422
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
● ABS & Brake assist
● VSC
● TRAC
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:
● Active Torque Control 4WD system (if equipped)
■ When stowing the flat tire
● Make sure the rear seats are in their original position.
● Secure it using a tire tie-down belt. Otherwise, the flat tire may fly out
in case of the sudden braking or an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
5
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
423
When trouble arises
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 352)
424
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting
procedure (→P. 115) or releasing the steering lock (→P. 117), confirm
the following points.
■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (→P. 115)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 66)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
5
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 428)
■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 428)
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
425
When trouble arises
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (automatic transmission)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1
Set the parking brake.
STEP 2
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position.
STEP 3
Depress the brake pedal.
STEP 4
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.
STEP 5
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
426
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. Bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
427
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged.
You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following
the steps below.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
STEP 1
5
Remove the engine cover.
Raise the rear of the engine
cover to remove the two rear
clips, and then raise the front
of the engine cover to remove
the two front clips.
STEP 2
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
428
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
STEP 3
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the engine switch to the “ON” position then start the vehicle's engine.
STEP 5
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
5
When trouble arises
429
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
STEP 1
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
STEP 2
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 3
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the engine switch to the “ON” position then start the vehicle's engine.
STEP 4
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
430
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned
off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■ Battery precautions
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
431
5
When trouble arises
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the catalytic converter may
overheat and become a fire hazard.
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
■ When attaching the engine cover (1.8 L 4-cylinder [2ZR-FE] engine)
Ensure that the rubber grommets remain attached to the engine cover. If the
grommet is attached to the bolts, transfer grommets to the engine cover.
432
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.
STEP 2
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam
subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
STEP 3
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the
engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine and call your Toyota dealer.
STEP 4
5
433
5
When trouble arises
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 5
Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (→P. 449)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■ Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the
engine is running.
● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are
hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
434
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
5
When trouble arises
435
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP 1
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).
STEP 2
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
STEP 3
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
STEP 4
Restart the engine.
STEP 5
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic transmission) or 1 or R position (manual transmission), release
the parking brake and carefully apply the accelerator to free
the vehicle.
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
436
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
STEP 3
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
STEP 4
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
STEP 3
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
STEP 4
Stop the engine by turning the
engine switch to the “ACC”
position.
STEP 5
438
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
● Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
5
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
440
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
171.9 in. (4365 mm)*1
Overall length
173.0 in. (4395 mm)*2
Overall width
69.5 in. (1765 mm)
61.0 in. (1550 mm)*4
Overall height*3
61.4 in. (1560 mm)*5
Wheelbase
Tread
102.4 in. (2600 mm)
Front
59.8 in. (1519 mm)
Rear
59.9 in. (1522 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
850 lb. (385 kg)
Towing capacity*6
(Trailer weight + cargo weight)
1500 lb. (680 kg)
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
442
Except S or XRS grade models
S or XRS grade models
Unladen vehicle
Vehicles without double wishbone rear suspension
Vehicles with double wishbone rear suspension
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine only
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certification Label on the driver’s side
center pillar.
6
Vehicle specifications
443
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
444
6-1. Specifications
Engine
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Model
2ZR-FE engine
Type
4 cylinder in line,
4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.17 × 3.48 in.
(80.5 × 88.3 mm)
Displacement
109.7 cu.in. (1798 cm3)
Drive belt tension*
143 ± 22 lbf (650 ± 100 N, 65 ± 10 kgf)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
Automatic adjustment
*:
Drive belt tension measured with Borroughs drive belt tension gauge No.
BT-33-73F (used belt), lb.
6
Vehicle specifications
445
6-1. Specifications
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Model
2AZ-FE engine
Type
4 cylinder in line,
4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.48 × 3.78 in.
(88.5 × 96.0 mm)
Displacement
144.1 cu.in. (2362 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.007 ⎯ 0.011 in.
(0.19 ⎯ 0.29 mm)
0.015 ⎯ 0.019 in.
(0.38 ⎯ 0.48 mm)
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
446
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill ⎯
reference)
With filter
Without filter
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp. qt.)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
3.8 qt. (3.6 L, 3.2 Imp. qt.)
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
447
Vehicle specifications
Outside temperature
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
6
6-1. Specifications
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil
may be used. However, SAE
0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
448
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Capacity
(Reference)
Coolant type
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
DENSO SC20HR11
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
DENSO SK20R11
NGK IFR6A11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
6
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Vehicle specifications
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.
449
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at
68°F (20°C):
12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all the lights turned off)
Charging rates
5 A max.
Manual transaxle
Gear oil capacity (Reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.0 qt. (1.9 L, 1.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
2.6 qt. (2.5 L, 2.2 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type
TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission
Gear Oil LV or equivalent
Recommended API grade
GL-4
Recommended gear oil
viscosity
SAE 75W
NOTICE
■ Manual transaxle gear oil
Using manual transmission gear oil other than “TOYOTA Genuine Manual
Transmission Gear Oil LV” may cause occurrence of idle rattling noise and
bad fuel consumption.
450
6-1. Specifications
Automatic transaxle
Fluid capacity (Reference)
Fluid type
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine (2WD
models)
8.2 qt. (7.8 L, 6.9 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine (AWD
models)
8.6 qt. (8.1 L, 7.1 Imp. qt.)
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”
may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your
vehicle.
6
Vehicle specifications
451
6-1. Specifications
Rear differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity
0.5 qt. (0.5 L, 0.4 Imp. qt.)
Oil type
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Recommended oil viscosity
Above 0°F (-18°C): SAE 90
Below 0°F (-18°C): SAE 80W or 80W-90
Transfer (AWD models)
Oil capacity
0.8 qt. (0.8 L, 0.7 Imp. qt.)
Oil type
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Recommended oil viscosity
Above 0°F (-18°C): SAE 90
Below 0°F (-18°C): SAE 80W or 80W-90
Clutch
Pedal free play
0.2 ⎯ 0.6 in. (5 ⎯ 15 mm)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
452
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
Pedal clearance*1
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
3.4 in. (87 mm)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
• AWD models: 3.4 in. (87 mm)
• 2WD models with P215/45R18 tires:
3.4 in. (87 mm)
• 2WD models with tires other than the
above: 3.3 in. (85 mm)
Pedal free play
0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit*2
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*3
6 ⎯ 9 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
*1:
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (294 N, 30
kgf) while the engine is running
*2:
*3:
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine with 18-inch tires or AWD models
Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 44 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf)
6
Vehicle specifications
453
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
16-inch tires
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
P205/55R16 89H, T135/80R16 101M or
T135/70R17 102M
2WD models
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
AWD models
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Wheel size
16 × 6 1/2 J, 16 × 4T or 17 × 4T (compact
spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
454
6-1. Specifications
17-inch tires
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
P215/45R17 87W, T135/80R16 101M or
T135/70R17 102M
2WD models
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
AWD models
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or
bar)
Wheel size
17 × 7 J, 16 × 4T or 17 × 4T (compact
spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
18-inch tires
P215/45R18 89W, T135/70R17 102M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size
18 × 7 J, 17 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire size
455
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
9006
9005
51
60
F
B
3457NA
27/7
D
Front fog lights (if
equipped)
⎯
55
A
Rear turn signal lights
⎯
21
D
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights
7443
21/5
C
⎯
5
C
Back-up lights
921
16
C
Personal lights
⎯
8
C
Interior light
⎯
8
E
Headlights
Low beam
High beam
Front turn signal/parking and front side
marker lights
Exterior
License plate lights
Interior
A: H11 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Double end bulbs
456
B: HB3 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
F: HB4 halogen bulbs
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., the Europe and Japan have
developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
457
Vehicle specifications
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
6
6-1. Specifications
■ Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems.
■ Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline
● Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
● If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
458
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s catalytic converters
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that
stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor
hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
6
Vehicle specifications
459
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size
(→P. 463)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(→P. 462)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators
460
(→P. 351)
6-1. Specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 355)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 454)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tires or all season tires
(→P. 356)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
(→P. 420)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
6
Vehicle specifications
461
6-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification
(TIN)
Number
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional
type code (3 or 4 letters)
tire
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The
DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
462
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
6
Vehicle specifications
463
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
464
6-1. Specifications
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
465
Vehicle specifications
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
6
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended inflation pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
466
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1* below), and dividing by two
467
6
Vehicle specifications
Normal occupant
weight
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
468
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
469
6
Vehicle specifications
Innerliner separation
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Signal Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
least one sidewall
Test rim
470
) on at
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
*:
Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20
471
6
Vehicle specifications
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Wireless remote control
On
Off
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
On
Off
Unlocking operation
Wireless
remote control (if
equipped)
(→P. 26)
472
Automatic door lock
function to be activated
if door is not opened
after being unlocked
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On
Off
Door lock buzzer
On
Off
Panic function
On
Off
6-2. Customization
Item
Door lock
(vehicles
with power
door lock
system)
(→P. 29)
Illumination
(→P. 282)
Customized
setting
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
Off
On
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors. (vehicles with an automatic
transmission)
On
Off
Shifting gears to position other than P locks
all doors. (vehicles with
an automatic transmission)
On
Off
7.5 seconds
Time elapsed before
lights turn off
15 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
(vehicles with power
door lock system)
On
Operation after the
engine switch is turned
to the “LOCK” position
On
Off
Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer
On
Off
30 seconds
Off
6
Vehicle specifications
Seat belt
reminder
(→P. 404)
Default setting
Function
473
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
in cases such as after maintenance is performed on the vehicle.
Item
When to initialize
Reference
Maintenance data
After the maintenance is performed
P. 323
Tire pressure warning
system (if equipped)
• When rotating the tires on vehicles
differing with front and rear tire inflation pressure.
• When changing the tire size.
P. 352
474
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
476
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Tendez la sangle diagonale de
sorte
qu'elle
couvre
complètement l'épaule, sans
entrer en contact avec le cou
ou glisser de l'épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
7
For owners
477
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau
savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier
régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées,
ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
478
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag
instructions in English.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables frontaux
Sacs de sécurité gonflables conducteur et passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur
et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de
l'habitacle.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux et rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures.
479
7
For owners
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux
Participent à la protection du thorax des occupants des sièges
avant.
Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables
Capteurs de sacs de
sécurité gonflables frontaux
Système de classification
de l'occupant du siège
passager avant (ECU et
capteurs)
Capteurs de sacs de
sécurité gonflables latéraux
et rideau
Sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
passager avant
Boîtier électronique de sacs
de sécurité gonflables
Capteurs de sacs de
sécurité gonflables rideau
Sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
conducteur
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
rideau
Capteur de la position du
siège conducteur
Témoins indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG
OFF”
480
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SÉCURITÉ GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes
de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur
(FMVSS208). Le système de sacs de sécurité gonflables régule la
puissance de déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables
conducteur et passager avant. Le système de sac de sécurité
gonflable conducteur se compose d'un capteur de position de siège
conducteur, etc. Le système de sac de sécurité gonflable passager
avant se compose d'un capteur de classification des occupants du
siège passager avant, etc..
Les principaux éléments du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables
SRS sont illustrés ci-dessus. Le système des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS est commandé par un boîtier électronique. Ce boîtier
intègre un capteur de sécurité et un capteur de sac de sécurité
gonflable.
Lorsque la violence du choc frontal ou latéral l'exige, le système de
sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS déclenche les dispositifs
pyrotechniques de gonflage (générateurs de gaz). Le déploiement
rapide des sacs de sécurité gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une
réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un
gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
7
For owners
481
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une
violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le
conducteur se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable.
L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la
NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:
Sachant que la zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous
disposez d'une confortable marge de sécurité en vous plaçant à 10 in.
(250 mm) de votre sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur. Cette distance
est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous
êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre
position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé,
simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des
difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un
coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre
véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a
pour effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre
poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant de direction et la vue des
commandes du tableau de bord.
482
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Si vous attachez une rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité à la boucle du
siège conducteur, mais pas à la
ceinture de sécurité proprement dite, le
système de sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS conducteur pense que vous avez
attaché votre ceinture de sécurité, alors
qu'en fait c'est faux. Dans ce cas, il se
peut que le sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur ne se déploie pas
correctement en cas d'accident, et vous
risquez d'être tué ou grièvement
blessé. Veillez donc à porter la ceinture
de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture
de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également
avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire
mortelle si le passager avant se trouve très près du sac de sécurité
gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager avant au maximum du sac de
sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte à être assis bien
droit dans le siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un
sac de sécurité gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les
enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota
recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient
installés sur le siège arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés.
C'est à l'arrière que les nourrissons et les enfants sont les mieux protégés.
483
7
For owners
● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le
siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est
allumé. En cas d'accident, par la violence et la vitesse de son
déploiement, le sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant peut blesser
grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si vous l'avez installé à la place du passager
avant dans un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de
bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir
sur les genoux du passager avant.
● Ne conduisez pas le véhicule avec
quelque chose sur les genoux, et
n'autorisez pas non plus le passager à
voyager avec quelque chose sur les
genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller
sur le siège passager en appui contre
la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains
à l'extérieur du véhicule.
484
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord ou la garniture
centrale du volant de direction.
Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS conducteur et passager
avant, tout objet risque de se
transformer en projectile.
●Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit ou à la poignée de maintien.
●Ne suspendez aux crochets à
vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun
objet dur. En cas de déploiement du
sac de sécurité gonflable rideau SRS,
ces objets peuvent se transformer en
projectiles capables de vous blesser
grièvement, voire de vous tuer.
● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait
d'en gêner le déploiement.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
(oP. 480).
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils
sont alors encore très chauds.
7
For owners
485
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement d'un sac de
sécurité gonflable SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de
l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de
danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles
irritations de la peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et
arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par
votre concessionnaire Toyota.
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications
suivantes.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner
correctement ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS.
● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou du rail latéral de toit.
● Réparations ou modifications de l'aile avant, du bouclier avant, ou du côté
de l'habitacle.
● Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre (pare-buffle,
pare-kangourou, etc.).
● Modifications des suspensions du véhicule.
● Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que radio émetteur/récepteur ou
lecteurs CD.
● Aménagements apportés au véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un
handicap physique.
486
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C ............................................ 172
ABS........................................... 145
Active Torque Control 4WD
system ................................... 145
Air conditioning filter.............. 366
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter ............. 366
Air conditioning
system................................ 172
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.... 74
Airbag precautions for your
child...................................... 78
Airbag warning light.............. 402
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions............. 75
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................... 78
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............ 83
General airbag precautions .... 78
Locations of airbags ............... 71
Modification and disposal of
airbags ................................. 82
Proper driving posture ...... 69, 78
Side airbag operating
conditions............................. 75
Side airbag precautions.......... 78
SRS airbags ........................... 71
Antenna.....................................186
Anti-lock brake system............145
Ashtray......................................296
Audio input ...............................225
Audio system
Antenna.................................186
Audio input ............................225
AUX port................................225
CD player/changer ................190
iPod .......................................206
MP3/WMA disc......................197
Optimal use ...........................221
Portable music player............225
Radio.....................................183
Steering wheel audio
switch..................................227
Type ......................................180
USB memory.........................213
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission .........119
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P......................426
S mode..................................121
AUX port ...................................225
Auxiliary boxes ................291, 305
489
Alphabetical index
B Back door
Back door ................................34
Wireless remote control ..........26
Back-up lights
Wattage.................................456
Battery
Checking ...............................347
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ..............428
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................154
Bluetooth® audio .....................230
Bluetooth® phone ....................247
Bottle holder.............................290
Brake
Fluid ......................................345
Parking brake ........................127
Brake assist..............................145
Break-in tips .............................106
C Care
Exterior..................................316
Interior ...................................319
Seat belts ..............................320
Cargo capacity .........................150
Cargo hooks .............................304
CD changer...............................190
CD player ..................................190
Chains .......................................154
490
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition..........88
Booster seats, installation .......92
Convertible seats,
definition ...............................88
Convertible seats,
installation.............................92
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............83
Infant seats, definition .............88
Infant seats, installation ..........92
Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors.................................93
Installing CRS with
seat belts ..............................95
Installing CRS with top tether
straps....................................99
Child safety
Airbag precautions ..................78
Battery precautions ....... 348, 431
Child restraint system .............88
Child-protectors.......................30
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................48
Installing child restraints..........92
Moon roof precautions ............61
Power window lock switch ......57
Power window precautions .....58
Removed key battery
precautions ......................... 369
Seat belt extender
precautions ...........................50
Seat belt precautions ..............49
Alphabetical index
Child-protectors ........................ 30
Cleaning
Exterior ................................. 316
Interior .................................. 319
Seat belts ............................. 320
Clock ........................................ 295
Compass .................................. 311
Condenser ............................... 344
Console box............................. 287
Cooling system
Engine overheating .............. 433
Cruise control.......................... 141
Cup holder ............................... 288
Curtain shield airbags .............. 71
Customizable features............ 472
D Daytime running light
system ................................... 136
Defogger
Rear window......................... 179
Side mirror............................ 179
Dimension................................ 442
Dinghy towing .................. 167,168
Display
Trip meter ............................. 129
Do-it-yourself maintenance.... 328
Doors
Door lock .......................... 26, 29
Door windows......................... 57
Side mirrors ............................ 55
Driver's seat belt reminder
light ........................................ 404
Driving
Break-in tips ..........................106
Correct posture .......................69
Procedures............................104
Winter driving tips..................154
E Electric power steering ...........145
Emergency flashers
Switch....................................390
Emergency, in case of
If a warning light turns on ......401
If the engine will not start ......425
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P......................426
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ..............428
If the warning buzzer
sounds ................................401
If you have a flat tire .............411
If you lose your keys .............427
If you think something is
wrong ..................................397
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................436
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency ...438
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ..................................391
If your vehicle overheats .......433
491
Alphabetical index
Engine
Compartment ........................337
Engine switch ........................115
Hood......................................332
How to start the
engine .................................115
Identification number.............443
If the engine will not start ......425
Ignition switch........................115
Overheating...........................433
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................449
Checking ...............................343
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................154
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ......................................129
Engine immobilizer system.......66
Engine oil
Capacity ................................447
Checking ...............................339
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................154
Engine oil maintenance
data .........................................341
EPS............................................145
Event data recorder .................399
492
F Floor mat .................................. 303
Fluid
Brake..................................... 345
Washer.................................. 349
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 380
Switch ................................... 137
Wattage................................. 456
Front passenger occupant
classification system ..............83
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light ........................ 404
Front seats
Adjustment ..............................38
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 380
Switch ................................... 135
Wattage................................. 456
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 380
Switch ................................... 126
Wattage................................. 456
Fuel
Capacity ................................ 446
Fuel gauge ............................ 129
Fuel pump shut off system.... 398
Gas station information ......... 500
Information ............................ 457
Refueling.................................62
Type ...................................... 446
Alphabetical index
Fuel door.................................... 62
Fuel filler door ........................... 62
Fuel pump shut off system .... 398
Fuses........................................ 371
G Gas station information.......... 500
Gauges ..................................... 129
Glove box................................. 287
Grocery bag hooks ................. 300
H Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone) ............... 247
Hazard lights
Switch................................... 390
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................ 44
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 380
Switch................................... 135
Wattage ................................ 456
Heaters
Side mirror............................ 179
Hood ......................................... 332
Hooks
Cargo hooks ......................... 304
Grocery bag hooks ............... 300
Horn.......................................... 128
I
I/M test.......................................327
Identification number
Engine ...................................443
Vehicle ..................................443
Ignition switch..........................115
Illuminated entry system.........283
Indicator lights .........................132
Initialization
Items to initialize....................474
Inside rear view mirror ..............53
Interior lights
Interior lights..........................282
Switch....................................283
Wattage.................................456
J Jack
Positioning a floor jack ..........334
Vehicle-equipped jack ...........411
Jack handle ..............................411
K Keyless entry..............................26
Keys
Engine switch ........................115
If you lose your keys .............427
Ignition switch........................115
Key number.............................24
Keyless entry...........................26
Keys ........................................24
Wireless remote control key....26
493
Alphabetical index
L License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs .............380
Switch....................................135
Wattage.................................456
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................380
Wattage.................................456
Lights
Emergency flasher switch .....390
Fog light switch .....................137
Hazard light switch ................390
Headlights switch ..................135
Interior light switch ................283
Personal light switch .....284, 285
Replacing light bulbs .............380
Turn signal lever....................126
Wattage.................................456
Load capacity ...........................153
Lock steering column..............117
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance .......................328
General maintenance............324
Maintenance data..................442
Maintenance requirements....322
Manual transmission
Manual transmission .............124
Meter
Instrument panel light
control .................................131
Meters ...................................129
494
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror ............53
Side mirror heater ................. 179
Side mirrors.............................55
Vanity mirrors........................ 294
Moon roof ...................................59
MP3 disc ................................... 197
N Noise from under vehicle..........18
O Odometer.................................. 129
Oil
Engine oil .............................. 339
Opener
Fuel filler door .........................62
Hood ..................................... 332
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............55
Outside temperature
display .................................... 129
Overheating, Engine................ 433
P Parking brake ........................... 127
Parking lights
Replacing light bulb............... 380
Switch ................................... 135
Wattage................................. 456
Personal lights
Switch ........................... 284, 285
Wattage................................. 456
Power outlet ............................. 298
Power windows..........................57
Alphabetical index
R Radiator.................................... 344
Radio ........................................ 183
Rear seats
Folding down .......................... 42
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulb .............. 380
Switch................................... 135
Wattage ................................ 456
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 380
Switch................................... 126
Wattage ................................ 456
Rear view mirror
Compass .............................. 311
Rear window defogger............ 179
Rear window wiper.................. 140
Replacing
Fuses.................................... 371
Key battery ........................... 368
Light bulbs ............................ 380
Tires ..................................... 411
Reporting safety defects for
U.S.A. owners........................ 476
S Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt ............ 46
Automatic Locking
Retractor .............................. 47
Child restraint system
installation ............................ 92
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts...................... 320
Emergency Locking
Retractor ...............................47
How to wear your seat belt......46
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................48
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use .................................48
Reminder light .......................404
Seat belt extenders .................48
Seat belt pretensioners ...........47
Seatback table..........................302
Seating capacity.......................153
Seats
Adjustment ..............................38
Adjustment precautions...........40
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ................92
Cleaning ................................319
Head restraint..........................44
Properly sitting in the seat.......69
Rear seat folding down ...........42
Seatback table ......................302
Service reminder
indicators ..............................132
Shift lever
Automatic transmission .........119
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P.................426
Manual transmission .............124
Shift lock system .....................426
Side airbags................................71
495
Alphabetical index
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs .............380
Switch....................................135
Wattage.................................456
Side mirror
Adjusting .................................55
Spare tire
Inflation pressure...................360
Storage location ....................411
Spark plug ................................449
Specifications...........................442
Speedometer ............................129
Steering
Column lock release..............117
Steering wheel
Adjustment ..............................52
Audio switches ......................227
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs .............380
Wattage.................................456
Storage feature.........................286
Storage precautions ................150
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................436
Sun visors.................................293
Sunshade
Roof.........................................60
Switch
Emergency flasher switch .....390
Engine switch ........................115
Fog light switch .....................137
Hazard light switch ................390
Ignition switch........................115
Light switches........................135
Power door lock switch ...........29
Power window switch ..............57
Window lock switch .................57
Wiper and washer switch ......138
496
T Tachometer .............................. 129
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 380
Switch ................................... 135
Wattage................................. 456
Talk switch ............................... 253
Telephone switch..................... 253
Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system .....66
Theft prevention labels .............68
Tie-down belts..........................304
Tire inflation pressure ............. 360
Tire information
Glossary................................ 466
Size ....................................... 463
Tire identification number...... 462
Uniform tire quality
grading................................ 464
Tires
Chains................................... 154
Checking ............................... 351
If you have a flat tire.............. 411
Inflation pressure .................. 360
Inflation pressure sensor....... 352
Replacing .............................. 411
Rotating tires......................... 351
Size ....................................... 454
Snow tires ............................. 154
Spare tire .............................. 411
Tonneau cover ......................... 306
Tools ......................................... 411
Total load capacity .................. 153
Towing
Dinghy towing ............... 167, 168
Trailer towing ................ 158, 159
Alphabetical index
TRAC ........................................ 146
Traction control....................... 146
Trip meter................................. 129
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 380
Switch................................... 126
Wattage ................................ 456
V Vanity mirrors.......................... 294
Vehicle identification
number................................... 443
Vehicle stability control.......... 146
VSC........................................... 146
W Warning buzzers
Brake system........................ 401
Downshifting......................... 123
Seat belt reminder ................ 404
Warning lights
Active Torque Control 4WD
system warning light .......... 402
Anti-lock brake system ......... 402
Brake assist system ............. 402
Brake system........................ 401
Charging system .................. 402
Electric power steering
warning light....................... 402
Engine oil maintenance ........ 404
Engine oil pressure............... 402
Low fuel level........................ 404
Low tire pressure warning
light .....................................404
Malfunction indicator lamp ....402
Open door .............................404
Pretensioners ........................402
Seat belt reminder light .........404
SRS airbags ..........................402
Washer fluid ..........................404
Washer
Checking ...............................349
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................154
Switch....................................138
Washing and waxing ...............316
Weight
Cargo capacity ......................150
Load limits .............................153
Weight ...................................442
Wheels ......................................364
Window glasses ........................57
Window lock switch...................57
Windows
Power windows .......................57
Rear window defogger ..........179
Washer..................................138
Windshield wipers ...................138
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery ............368
Wireless remote control ..........26
WMA disc..................................197
497
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 411 If you have a flat tire
P. 425 If the engine will not start
The engine does not start
P. 66
Engine immobilizer system
P. 428 If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 426
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 433 If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
The key is lost
P. 427 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 428 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 29
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 436 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light
comes on
P. 401
498
Doors
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...
What to do if...
■Warning lights
Brake system warning
light
Active Torque Control 4WD sysP. 402
tem warning light
or
P. 401
Maintenance required
reminder light P. 404
Charging system warnP. 402
ing light
Tire pressure warning
P. 404
light
Low engine oil pressure
P. 402
warning light
Low windshield washer fluid level
P. 404
warning light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Slip indicator
light
P. 402
or
P. 402
SRS warning light
P. 402
ABS warning light
Cruise control indicator
light*
P. 402
Open door warning light
P. 404
Low fuel level warning
P. 404
light
or
P. 402
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light P. 404
Electric power steering
warning light
P. 402
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 404
*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
499
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 332
Hood lock release lever
P. 332
Fuel filler door
P. 62
Fuel filler door opener
P. 62
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
1.8 L
4-cylinder
(2ZR-FE)
Engine oil
engine
capacity
(Drain and refill ⎯ 2.4 L
reference)
4-cylinder
(2AZ-FE)
engine
Engine oil type
P. 63, 446
P. 454
Cold tire inflation pressure
500
Tire inflation pressure
P. 454
With filter
Without filter
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
4.4 (4.2, 3.7)
4.1 (3.9, 3.4)
With filter
Without filter
4.0 (3.8, 3.3)
3.8 (3.6, 3.2)
P. 447
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement